2007 gmc topkick owner manual m - general motors · pdf file2007 gmc topkick owner manual m 1....

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 20Safety Belts ............................................ 21Child Restraints ...................................... 42Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 81

Features and Controls ................................ 83Keys ....................................................... 84Doors and Locks .................................... 89Windows ................................................ 91Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 93Mirrors .................................................. 132Storage Areas ...................................... 134

Instrument Panel ....................................... 135Instrument Panel Overview ................... 138Climate Controls ................................... 155Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 159Audio System(s) ................................... 182

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 201Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 202Towing ................................................. 237

Service and Appearance Care .................. 241Service ................................................. 244Fuel ...................................................... 247Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 263Rear Axle ............................................. 309Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 311Front Axle ............................................ 312Noise Control System ........................... 313Bulb Replacement ................................ 314Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 314Other Service Items .............................. 316Tires ..................................................... 320Appearance Care .................................. 331Vehicle Identification ............................. 340

2007 GMC TopKick Owner Manual M

1

Electrical System .................................. 341Capacities and Specifications ................ 348Normal Maintenance Replacement

Parts ................................................. 354

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 359Maintenance Schedule .......................... 360

Customer Assistance Information ............. 403Customer Assistance and Information ... 404Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 414

Index .......................................................... 417

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,GMC, the GMC Truck Emblem, and the nameTOPKICK are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for GM Medium Duty Truck Division when itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15862456 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Bucket Seats ................................................ 9Split Bench Seat (80/20 Split) ..................... 13Air Suspension Seats .................................. 13

Rear Seats .................................................... 20Rear Seat Operation ................................... 20

Safety Belts .................................................. 21Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 21Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 35Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 36Right Front Passenger Position ................... 36Center Passenger Position .......................... 37Rear Outside Passenger Positions

(Crew Cab) .............................................. 38Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41

Child Restraints ............................................ 42Older Children ............................................. 42Infants and Young Children ......................... 45Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint

(Regular Cab Models) .............................. 54Where to Put the Restraint

(Crew Cab Models) .................................. 55Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 57Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position(Crew Cab Models) .................................. 58

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Rear Seat Position (Crew Cab)or Center Front Position ........................... 60

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position .................................. 63

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 68Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 74How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 74What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 74Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 76

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 79Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 80Restraint System Check ............................... 81

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 81Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 82

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Bucket SeatsIf your vehicle has bucket seats, you can adjustthe seats several different ways.

Fore-and-Aft Adjustment

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust the seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or make youpush a pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

You can adjust the seat forward or rearward withthe bar located under the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat towhere you want it and release the bar. Try to movethe seat with your body to be sure the seat islocked in place.

9

Lumbar AdjustmentYour seats may have this feature.

The lumbar adjustmentknob is located on theseatback, on theinboard side of thedriver’s seat and on theoutboard side of thepassenger’s seat.

For more support to your lower back, turn thelumbar adjustment knob clockwise. To decreasethe amount of lumbar support, turn the knobcounterclockwise.

Seatback Adjustment

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

10

The recline lever is located on the outboard sideof the driver’s and passenger’s seat cushions.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.


11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Split Bench Seat (80/20 Split)If your vehicle has a split bench seat, thepassenger seat is not adjustable.There is a storage area underneath the seatcushion. See Storage Areas on page 134.

Air Suspension SeatsYour vehicle may have a low-back or high-back airsuspension seat. There are several ways toadjust the seat.

Fore-and-Aft AdjustmentIf your vehicle hasthis lever it is locatedunderneath the frontof the driver’s seat.

To slide the seat forward or rearward, move thelever toward the outboard side of the seat. The seatwill lock in at 1/2 inch (1.5 cm) increments.

If your vehicle has an adjustment bar, it is locatedunder the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat towhere you want it and release the bar. Try to movethe seat with your body to be sure the seat islocked in place.

13

Height Adjustment

If your vehicle has an air suspension seat heightadjustment lever, it is located on the frontinboard side of the seat.

Seat Height AdjustmentLever

Seat Height Adjustment Switch

14

To adjust the height of the air suspension seat,pull the lever up to inflate. Push the lever downto deflate.

If your vehicle has an air suspension seat heightadjustment switch, it is located below the frontof the seat cushion on the inboard side of the seat.

Push the left side of the switch to inflate. Pushthe right side of the switch to deflate.

Your seat cushion may also be able to be raisedor lowered.

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the seat cushionheight adjustmenthandle is locatedunderneath the frontof the seat.

To adjust the height of the cushion, lift the handleup and pull it forward. You can choose betweentwo settings.

15

Lumbar Adjustment

If your vehicle has a lumbar adjustment knob,it is located on the inboard side of the driver’sseatback, or on the outboard side of thepassenger’s seatback.

LumbarAdjustment Knob

Lumbar Adjustment Switch

16

For more support to your lower back, turn thelumbar adjustment knob clockwise. To decreasethe amount of lumbar support, turn the knobcounterclockwise.

If your vehicle has a lumbar adjustment switch, itis located below the front of the seat cushionon the outboard side of the seat.

For more support to your lower back, push theright side of the switch. To decrease the amount oflumbar support, press the left side of the switch.

Seatback AdjustmentYour vehicle has one of the following seatbackadjustment levers.

Lever Located OnOutboard Side

17

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,the release the lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.


Lever Located OnInboard Side

18

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Chugger-Snubber Lock-Out Feature

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the driver’sand passenger’s seats.

Move the handle down to reduce any backslapexperienced while in tractor/trailer operationor while operating a dump truck application.

19

Rear SeatsRear Seat OperationFolding the Rear Seat (Crew Cab)

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

The rear bench seat on the crew cab can be foldeddown to provide more cargo space.

To fold down theseatback, pull this nylonstrap located on therear of the seat,while pulling theseatback down.

To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap whileraising the seatback until it locks upright.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

After raising a seatback to an upright position,push and pull on the seatback to check that it islocked in place.

20

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 162.

21

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

Q: Aren’t safety belts for kids?

A: Yes. And they are for adult truckers, andanyone else who rides in your vehicle.

Here is why: when your vehicle goes, say,30 mph (50 km/h), so do you and your passengers.

22

If the vehicle hits something, it stops – right then.But nothing stops the people. They keep moving.

Then something will stop them. It could be thewindshield.

23

Or it could be the instrument panel.

Now, what if you and your passengers were togive that big vehicle a chance to deal withthe force of the impact, instead of you?

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop.

You stop over more distance, and your strongestbones take the forces. Safety belts are foreveryone.

24

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

25

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 45. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

26

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 35.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

27

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

28

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

29


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

30


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

31


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

32


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

33


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

34

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressin at the top of thearrows and move theheight adjuster tothe desired position.You can move theheight adjuster up justby pushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingin to make sure it has locked into position.

35

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt ina crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, thekey to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt. If your vehiclehas a static seat in this position and if you ever pullthe shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, youwill engage the child restraint locking feature. If thishappens, just let the belt go back all the way andstart again.

36

Center Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position. If your vehicleis a crew cab, someone can also sit in the centerrear position.

When you sit in a center seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pullit along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

37

Rear Outside Passenger Positions(Crew Cab)It is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe positions next to the windows havelap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear oneproperly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

38

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckleis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

39

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

Each position next to the windows has a shoulderbelt height adjuster. See Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment on page 35.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

40

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

41

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to awindow so the child can wear a lap-shoulderbelt and get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touchingthe top of the thighs. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of thevehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

If the child is so small that the shoulder belt isstill very close to the child’s face or neck,you might want to place the child in a rear seatthat has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

44

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

45

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

We know securing a child can present realproblems in a medium-duty vehicle like yours.

If your vehicle is a regular cab model withan air-suspension seat in the right frontpassenger’s position, there is no place inyour vehicle to secure a child restraint.

The only answer is to have smaller children makethe trip in another vehicle, where they can getthe protection they need.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt,following the instructions that came withthat restraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt. A child can be endangered in a crash if thechild restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

53

Where to Put the Restraint(Regular Cab Models)If your vehicle is a regular cab model with anair-suspension seat in the right front passenger’sposition, there is no place in your vehicle tosecure a child restraint. The only answer is to havesmaller children make the trip in another vehicle,where they can get the protection they need.

{CAUTION:

A child restraint cannot be securedproperly in an air-suspension type seat.This is because an air-suspension seat isdesigned to move up and down for anadult passenger. Do not use a childrestraint in an air-suspension seat.

If your vehicle is a regular cab model with a staticseat in the right front passenger’s position, or ifit has a bench seat, the child restraint mustbe secured properly in the right front passenger’sseat. If your vehicle has airbags and you need

to secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat, there is a switch on theinstrument panel that you can use to turn off thepassenger’s airbag. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 76 and Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 63 for moreon this, including important safety information.

Unless the passenger’s airbag has been turned off,never put a rear-facing child restraint in thisvehicle. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in this vehicle unless thepassenger’s airbag has been turned off.

CAUTION: (Continued)

54


Even though the airbag off switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe,and no one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles witha rear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front static seat or theright front bench seat, always move thepassenger seat as far back as it will go.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Where to Put the Restraint(Crew Cab Models)Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat position, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child ridingin a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

If your vehicle has airbags and you need tosecure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat, there is a switch on theinstrument panel that you can use to turn off thepassenger’s airbag. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 76 and Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 63 for moreon this, including important safety information.

55

Unless the passenger’s airbag has been turnedoff, never put a rear-facing child restraint inthis vehicle. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure to turn off theairbag before using a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position.



Even though the airbag off switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’sairbag, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front static seat orright front bench seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

56

If your vehicle has an air-suspension seat in theright front passenger’s position, do not securea child restraint there. Here is why:

{CAUTION:


Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. Aspart of the LATCH system, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a top tether. TheLATCH system can help hold the child restraint inplace during driving or in a crash. Some vehicleshave lower and/or top tether anchors designedto secure a child restraint with lower attachmentsand/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a top tether aredesigned to be used whether the top tether isanchored or not. Other child restraints require thatthe top tether be anchored. A national or locallaw may require that the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached.

57

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or toptether anchors to secure a child restraint withthe LATCH system. If a national or local lawrequires that your top tether be anchored, do notuse a child restraint in this vehicle because atop tether cannot be properly anchored. You mustuse the safety belts to secure your child restraintin this vehicle, unless a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be anchored. Refer toyour child restraint instructions and instructionsin this manual for securing a child restraint usingthe vehicle’s safety belts.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Outside Seat Position(Crew Cab Models)There are no top tether anchors in the rearoutside seat positions. Do not secure a child seatin these positions if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure tofollow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

58

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

59

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Rear Seat Position(Crew Cab) or Center Front PositionThere are no top tether anchors in thesepositions. Do not secure a child seat in thesepositions if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored.

You will be using the lap belt.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child in the childrestraint when and as the instructions say. But donot use the center front passenger position ifyour vehicle has airbags, or if the child restraintinterferes with shifting gears.

60

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger airbag if itinflates. If your vehicle has airbags, neversecure a child restraint in the center frontseat. It is always better to secure a childrestraint in the rear seat if your vehiclehas one. You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front passengerstatic seat, but before you do, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tiltingthe latch plate and pulling it along the belt.


3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

61


5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while youpush down on the child restraint. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for anadult or large child passenger.

62

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionDo not use a child restraint with an airsuspension seat.

{CAUTION:


There is no top tether anchor in this position. Do notsecure a child seat in this position if a national orlocal law requires that the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether must be anchored.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 57 if your child restraint hasa top tether.

If your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag,there is a switch on the instrument panel that youcan use to turn off the right front passenger’s airbagwhen you need to secure a child restraint in theright front passenger’s position. See Airbag OffSwitch on page 76 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

United States Canada

63

A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. Never put arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag is off.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if thepassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in this vehicle unless thepassenger’s airbag has been turned off.



Even though the airbag off switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe,and no one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles witha rear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front static seat or theright front bench seat, always move thepassenger seat as far back as it will go.

64

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comeson when you have turned off the airbag, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 76 and Airbag Readiness Light onpage 163 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure tofollow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. If your vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag see Airbag Off Switch on page 76. Ifyour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag and your child restraint isforward-facing, always move the seat as farback as it will go before securing it in this seat.See Bucket Seats on page 9. Never use arear-facing child restraint in this seat unlessthe airbag is off.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

65


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

66

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.

67

If you were using a child restraint in a vehicleequipped with a right front passenger’s airbag, turnon the right front passenger’s airbag when youremove the child restraint from the vehicle unlessthe person who will be sitting there is a memberof a passenger airbag risk group. See AirbagOff Switch on page 76.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not ina risk group identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group.See Airbag Off Switch on page 76 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Airbag SystemIf it says AIR BAG on the middle part of thesteering wheel and AIR BAG on the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger’sseat, your vehicle has an airbag for the driverand an airbag for the right front passenger.

If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of thesteering wheel, but it does not say AIR BAG onthe instrument panel in front of the right frontpassenger’s seat, your vehicle has an airbagfor the driver only.

If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of thesteering wheel, but there is no right frontpassenger seat, your vehicle has an airbagfor the driver only.

If it does not say AIR BAG on the middle part ofthe steering wheel, your vehicle does not haveairbags.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of injury from the force of an inflatingairbag. But these airbags must inflate very quicklyto do their job and comply with federal regulations.

68

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things insidethe vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designed towork with safety belts, but do not replace



them. Airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

69

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. If you are tooclose to an inflating airbag, as you wouldbe if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position before and during acrash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

If your vehicle has an airbag for the right frontpassenger, please read this:

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 42 and Infants and Young Childrenon page 45.

70

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbagsymbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 163 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

71

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

72

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events andare used to predict how severe a crash is likely tobe in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontalairbags will or should deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largelyon what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down. Thethreshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. Inflation is determinedby what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact,and how quickly the vehicle slows down.

73

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle is in acrash. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. Theinflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag modules inside the steering wheel and inthe instrument panel in front of the right frontpassenger.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. The airbagsupplements the protection provided by safetybelts. Airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually. But airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward those airbags.Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag or the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s bag — may be hot for a shorttime. The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

74

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After they inflate, you will need some newparts for your airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there tohelp protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 409.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

75

Airbag Off SwitchIf your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag, ithas a switch on the instrument panel that you canuse to turn off the right front passenger’s airbag.

This switch should only be turned to the offposition if the person in the right front passenger’sposition is a member of a passenger risk groupidentified by the national government as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) mustride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• My vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• The infant has a medical condition which,according to the infant’s physician, makesit necessary for the infant to ride in the frontseat so that the driver can constantlymonitor the child’s condition.

Child Age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in therear seat(s) whenever possible, childrenages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available in the rearseat(s) of my vehicle; or

• The child has a medical condition which,according to the child’s physician, makesit necessary for the child to ride in the frontseat so that the driver can constantly monitorthe child’s condition.


76

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to his orher physician:• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a

special risk for the passenger; and

• Makes the potential harm from the passengerairbag in a crash greater than the potentialharm from turning off the airbag and allowingthe passenger, even if belted, to hit thedashboard or windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not ina risk group identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group.

To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag, insertyour ignition key into the switch, push in, and movethe switch to the off position.


77

The airbag off light will come on to let you know thatthe right front passenger’s airbag is off. The light willstay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The rightfront passenger’s airbag will remain off until youturn it back on.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the airbag, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat) until you have your vehicle serviced.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 163for additional information.

To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on, insertyour ignition key into the switch, push in, and movethe switch to the on position.


78

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 415.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

79

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front ofthe vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also, theairbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 404.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, theinstrument panel, or airbag wiring can affectthe operation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 404.

80

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 334for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,the airbag may not work properly. You mayhave to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel or both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag. Do not open or break theairbag coverings.

81

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to havesafety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. Newparts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

82

Keys .............................................................. 84Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 85Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 86Doors and Locks .......................................... 89

Door Locks ................................................. 89Power Door Locks ....................................... 90

Windows ....................................................... 91Manual Windows ......................................... 91Power Windows .......................................... 92Sliding Rear Window ................................... 92Sun Visors .................................................. 93

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 93New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 93Ignition Positions ......................................... 94Engine Starter Over-Crank Protection .......... 95Starting the Gasoline Engine ....................... 95Starting the Diesel Engine ........................... 98Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown ..... 102High Idle System ....................................... 104Exhaust Restrictor (Engine Warm-Up) ........ 105Engine Checks Before Operating ............... 107Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 108

Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake .................... 109Two-Speed Rear Axle Electric

Shift Control ........................................... 111Air Shift Control (Automatic Transmission) ... 112Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 113Manual Transmission Operation ................. 114Power Take-Off (PTO) ............................... 116Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 117Parking ...................................................... 123Parking Brake (With Hydraulic Brakes) ...... 124Parking Brake (with Air Brakes) ................. 125Parking Brake Burnish Procedure .............. 127Air Suspension .......................................... 128Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 129Engine Exhaust ......................................... 130Running the Engine While Parked ............. 131

Mirrors ......................................................... 132Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 132Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 132Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 132Outside Convex Mirrors ............................. 133Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 133

Storage Areas ............................................. 134Center Console Storage Area .................... 134

Section 2 Features and Controls

83

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

84

Your vehicle hasone double-sided keyfor the ignition andall door locks.

If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be ableto assist you with obtaining a new one.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callGM Roadside Assistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 408.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

85

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 86.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationIf your vehicle has this feature, you can lock andunlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) upto 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keylessentry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

To unlock thedriver’s door, pressthe UNLOCKbutton once.

If you press the button again within five seconds,all of the doors will unlock. When the UNLOCKbutton is pressed, the interior dome lampsare turned on for about 40 seconds or until theignition switch is activated. Press the LOCK buttonto lock all doors.

86

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Eachvehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwon’t work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle before thetransmitter works, it’s probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, into theslot between the covers of the transmitternear the key ring hole. Remove the bottom bytwisting the object.

2. Remove and replace the battery, positive (+)side down. Use one CR2032 battery.

87

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter. If thetransmitter does not work after batteryreplacement, it may need to beresynchronized to your vehicle. SeeResynchronization following.

ResynchronizationResynchronization may be necessary due tothe security method used by this system.The transmitter does not send the same signaltwice to the receiver. The receiver will not respondto a signal it has been sent previously. Thisprevents anyone from recording and playing backthe signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close toyour vehicle and simultaneously press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on thetransmitter for at least five seconds. The door locksshould cycle to confirm resynchronization. If thelocks do not cycle, see your dealer for service.

88

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

89

If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, youcan use your transmitter to lock or unlock yourvehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 86.

To lock or unlock your door from the outside, useyour key.

To lock the door fromthe inside, slide themanual lever onthe door down. Tounlock the door, slidethe manual lever up.

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle haspower door locks, pressthe bottom of thepower door lock switchto lock all the doorsat once. To unlock allthe doors at once, pressthe top of the powerdoor lock switch.

When a door is locked, the inside door handle willnot work.

90

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsTurn the hand crank on each door to raise orlower the window.

91

Power Windows

If your vehicle has power windows, the switchesfor all windows are located on the driver’s door. Inaddition, each passenger door has a switch fortheir own window.

Press the rearward part of the switch to lower thewindow. Press the forward part of the switch toraise the window.

The power windows will operate when the ignitionis in ACCESSORY or RUN.

Express-DownThe driver’s window has an express-down feature.This allows the window to be lowered fully withoutcontinuously holding the switch. Press the switchdown fully to initiate the express-down feature.Press the top of the switch to stop the windowfrom lowering.

Window Lockout (Crew Cab)

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s windowswitches include a lockout feature. This preventsthe passenger’s from operating their windows.The driver can still operate all windows withthe lockout on. Press the button to turn thelockout feature on and off.

Sliding Rear WindowTo open the sliding rear window, pull the latchtoward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To close the window, slide the window toward thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch willautomatically lock into place. Try to openthe window without releasing the latch to be surethe window is in the locked position.

Regular Cab Switches

Crew Cab Switches

92

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down thevisors. You can also swing them out to block glarefrom the side.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Let your engine warm up before you

operate your vehicle under load.• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or

less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or

slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Use the lowest gear you can when you starta loaded vehicle in motion and when goingup hills to avoid overloading the engine.

• Check and adjust engine and transmissionfluid levels often and be sure tires areproperly inflated for the load you arecarrying.

• If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, seethe Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operationand Maintenance Manual.

93

Ignition PositionsWith your key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto five different positions.

A (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethings like the radio, power windows and thewindshield wipers when the engine is off. To getinto ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn ittoward you. Your steering wheel will remainlocked, just as it was before you inserted the key.

B (LOCK): This position locks your ignition,steering wheel and transmission. It is atheft-deterrent feature. You will only be able toremove your key when the ignition is turnedto LOCK.

C (OFF): This position lets you turn off the enginebut still turn the steering wheel. It does not lockthe steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF ifyou must have your vehicle in motion while theengine is off.

D (RUN): This is the position for driving.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

E (START): This position starts your engine.

94

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ignition while your vehicle is parked. You maynot be able to start your vehicle after it has beenparked for an extended period of time.

Engine Starter Over-CrankProtectionYour vehicle may have an engine starterover-crank protection system. If the starter motoroverheats and shuts off due to over-cranking,the motor must cool down before it will reset andallow starter operation. It can take up tosix minutes before the starter will work again.

Starting the Gasoline EngineThe 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter for yourengine. Use this number to verify the typeof engine in your vehicle. See Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) on page 340. Follow the propersteps to start the engine.

To start a diesel engine, see Starting the DieselEngine on page 98.

Automatic TransmissionSet the parking brake and move your shift lever toNEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P), if so equipped. Yourengine will not start in any other position — that is asafety feature.

Manual TransmissionSet the parking brake, shift to neutral NEUTRAL (N)and hold the clutch pedal to the floor while startingthe engine.

95

Starter Motor Operation• The starter motor will disengage if you release

the key or the engine reaches a predeterminedengine speed.

• To prevent overheating, the starter motor willdisengage after continuously operating for15 seconds. You must release the keyfrom the start position to re-engage the starter.

• The starter motor will not engage if the engineis already running.

• The starter motor will disengage if, aftertwo seconds, the starter pinion gear does notengage the flywheel or there is no enginerpm signal from the engine speed sensor.

Starting Your Engine1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn

your ignition key to START. When theengine starts, let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine gets warm.

2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,push the accelerator pedal all the way downand crank the engine for five more seconds,unless it starts sooner.

3. If your engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline.Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cooldown. Do Steps 1 through 3 again.When the engine starts, let go of the key andthe accelerator pedal.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If you ever need to have your vehicle towed, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 237.

96

Gasoline Engine Warm-UpWhen you have started your engine, let it run for20 or 30 seconds to warm up before you put aload on the engine.

Drive at moderate speeds for the first 2 to 3 miles(3.2 to 4.8 km), especially in cold weather. SeeHigh Idle System on page 104.

Restarting the Gasoline Engine WhileMoving (Automatic Transmission)If you have to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, you will first have to shift toNEUTRAL (N). This safety feature preventsstarting the engine when the transmission isin a drive gear.

Stopping the Gasoline EngineLet your engine idle for a few seconds beforeturning it off after you have finished driving yourvehicle.

If you shift to NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P), set theparking brake.

If your vehicle has a two-speed axle, put the rangeselector in low. To be sure the axle has shifted intolow, engage the clutch and transmission; thevehicle may move slightly when you do this.

While your engine is idling and before you turn itoff, you can make a list of any operational orhandling concerns to give to responsiblemaintenance personnel so they can handle themright away.

Moisture will condense in a fuel tank that is almostempty if the engine has not run for a while,even just overnight under some conditions. So, itis always best to refuel your vehicle at the endof each run.

97

Starting the Diesel EngineYour vehicle’s diesel engine starts differently thana gasoline engine. Read the following pages tolearn how to start, restart, warm-up, and stop yourdiesel engine.

The information applies to Caterpillar® DieselEngine, 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel Engine, Isuzu 6HDiesel Engine, unless otherwise noted.

If you have a Caterpillar® Diesel Engine, also referto your Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation &Maintenance Manual for the starting procedure.

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — that is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionMove your shift lever to NEUTRAL and hold theclutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine.Your vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down — that is a safety feature.

Starting Your Engine1. Turn your ignition key to RUN.

Observe the wait to start light. See Wait toStart Indicator on page 172. This light may notcome on if the engine is hot.If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, seeyour Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation& Maintenance Manual for proper wait to startlight operation.

2. As soon as the wait to start light goes off,immediately turn the ignition key to START.When the engine starts, let go of the key.If your vehicle is equipped with a DURAMAX®

6600 Diesel Engine, it has a fast warm-upglow plug system. The wait to start lightwill illuminate for a much shorter time thanmost diesel engines, due to the rapid heatingof the glow plug system.

98

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.

Notice: If the wait to start light stays onafter starting your vehicle, your vehicle maynot run properly. Have your vehicle servicedright away.

3. If the engine does not start after 15 secondsof cranking, turn the ignition key to OFF. Waitone minute for the starter to cool, then trythe same steps again.

If you are trying to start your engine after youhave run out of fuel, see Running Out of Fuel onpage 258.

When your engine is cold, let it run for a fewminutes before you move your vehicle. This letsoil pressure build up. Your engine will sound louderwhen it is cold.

Notice: If you are not in an idling vehicle andthe engine overheats, you would not bethere to see the overheated engine indication.This could damage your vehicle. Do not letyour engine run when you are not in yourvehicle.

Cold Weather StartingIf your vehicle has the 6.6L DURAMAX® DieselEngine and the Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine, thefollowing notice applies:

Notice: Your diesel engine has an electric airintake heater system which reduces whitesmoke and helps start the engine in coldweather. Do not spray starting fluid into the airintake where it can contact the heater elements.

If you do not have the GM Automatic EtherInjection System, do not use starting fluid oryou could damage your engine. If you have theGM system, use only GM approved startingfluid that has been tested to establishcompatibility with the air inlet heater system.

99

The following tips will help you get good starting incold weather.

• Use the recommended engine oil when theoutside temperature drops below freezing.See Engine Oil (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) onpage 264 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)on page 265 or Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/IsuzuDiesel Engine) on page 268. When theoutside temperature drops below 0°F (−18°C),use of the optional engine coolant blockheater is recommended.

• If you experience longer cranking times, noticean unusual amount of exhaust smoke or areat higher altitudes (over 7,000 ft. or 2 135 m),you may use your optional engine coolantblock heater. See Engine Coolant Heater onpage 108.

• See What Fuel to Use on page 249 forinformation on what fuel to use in coldweather.

Cold Weather Starting(Caterpillar® Diesel)Because the diesel engine uses compressionignition, it is harder to start in cold weather than agasoline engine. The air intake heater and useof the proper engine oil, optional engine coolantheaters and optional ether injection systemshelp cold weather starting. See the Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine Operation & Maintenance Manualfor more information.

Restarting the Diesel Engine WhileMoving (Automatic Transmission)If you have to restart the engine while the vehicle ismoving, you will first have to shift to NEUTRAL (N).This safety feature prevents starting the enginewhen the transmission is in a drive gear for moreinformation.

100

Stopping the Diesel Engine1. Set the parking brake and shift to

NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P).

2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.If your vehicle has a two-speed axle, seeTwo-Speed Rear Axle Electric Shift Controlon page 111.

If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see yourCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation &Maintenance Manual for additional information.

Diesel Engine Warm-UpSeveral factors affect how quickly your dieselengine warms up. These can include outsidetemperature, engine load, idle time and yourvehicle’s option content. Your vehicle may beequipped with some features that can helpthe engine reach operating temperature sooner.Some of these features are discussed below.

Also, remember that an automatic transmissionadds heat to the cooling system through the heatexchanger in the radiator. Because of this,vehicles equipped with automatic transmissionsare often able to retain engine coolant heat betterthan manual transmission vehicles.

See your Caterpillar® Operation & Maintenancemanual for additional diesel engine warm-upinformation.

If Your Diesel Engine Will Not StartIf you have run out of fuel, see Running Out ofFuel on page 258.

If you are not out of fuel, and your engine will notstart, do this:

Turn your ignition key to RUN. Immediately afterthe wait to start light goes off, turn the ignition keyto START.

If the light does not go off, wait a few seconds, thentry starting your engine again. And, see your dealeras soon as you can for a starting system check.

If the light comes on and then goes off and youknow your batteries are charged, but your enginestill will not start, your vehicle needs service.

101

If the light does not come on when the engine iscold, your vehicle needs service.

If your batteries do not have enough charge tostart your engine, see Battery on page 303.

Be sure you have the right oil for your engine, andthat you have changed the oil at the propertimes. If you use the wrong oil, your engine maybe harder to start.

Be sure you are using the proper fuel for existingweather conditions. See What Fuel to Use onpage 249.

If the engine starts, runs a short time, then stops,your vehicle needs service.

{CAUTION:

Do not use gasoline or starting aids, suchas ether, in the air intake. They coulddamage your engine. There could also be afire, which could cause serious personalinjury.

Engine Alarm and AutomaticShutdownYour check gages warning light will come on if thesystem senses high engine temperature or lowengine oil pressure. If high engine temperature orlow engine oil pressure is detected, you willalso hear a tone alarm at two beats per second.The alarm and the light will remain on untilthe condition is fixed. If the engine temperature oroil pressure condition worsens, the tone alarmwill go to five beats per second.

If the system senses low engine coolant, thefive beat per second alarm and the low coolantwarning light will come on.

The five beats per second tone alarmmeans that your engine will shut down in about25 to 30 seconds. There is also an engineshutdown light to indicate that the engine will shutdown. See Engine Shutdown Warning Light onpage 175.

102

Pull off the road and shut off the engine. Do notstart it until the reason for the problem is known,and the problem is fixed. If the engine shuts downwhen you are still in traffic, you can restart theengine and get another 25 to 30 seconds ofoperation. Do this only if you have to, since there isa problem that can harm the engine if it is not fixed.Engine automatic shutdown, for gasoline engines,requires activation by your dealer.

Notice: If you try to operate the vehicle afterthe engine automatically shuts down, youmay damage the vehicle. Have your vehiclerepaired as soon as possible.

Ambulance, Fire, and Rescue PackagesYour check gages warning light will come on ifthe system senses high engine temperature or lowengine oil pressure. If high engine temperatureor low engine oil pressure is detected, you will alsohear a tone alarm at two beats per second. Thealarm and the light will remain on until thecondition is fixed. If the engine temperature or oilpressure condition worsens, the tone alarmwill go to five beats per second.

If the system senses low engine coolant, thefive beat per second alarm and the low coolantwarning light will come on.

The engine will not shutdown, but you shouldhave the vehicle checked as soon as you can.

103

High Idle System

High Idle System with Switch

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the manual highidle switch is locatedin the instrument panelswitchbank.

This system can be used to increase your engineidle speed whenever the following conditionsare met:

• The brake pedal is not pressed.

• The vehicle speed is below about 5 mph(8 km/h) for vehicles with diesel engines. Thevehicle must not be moving and the acceleratormust not be pressed for vehicles with gasolineengines.

• If the vehicle has manual transmission theclutch pedal is not pressed or, if the vehiclehas the automatic transmission it is inNEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P).

The manual high idle feature is activated bypressing the switch on the instrument panel. Whenthe switch is pressed again, or any of theprevious conditions are not met, manual high idlewill be deactivated.The manual high idle has been preset at thefactory. Your dealer may change the setting to fityour needs.For vehicles with Caterpillar® diesel engines, thehigh idle switch can be used to set any desiredhigh idle speed.To set a new temporary engine idle speed do thefollowing:

1. Make sure all of the previously describedconditions are met.

2. Press the accelerator pedal to the desiredengine speed.

3. Momentarily press the manual high idle switch.The temporary high idle speed will be set. Thisnew high idle rpm level will be remembered by thesystem until either the ignition is turned to OFFor a new high idle speed is set.

104

Automatic High Idle SystemThe automatic high idle feature will engagewhenever you start your vehicle and the engine isbelow the preset operating temperature. Thiswill help decrease engine warm-up time.

On vehicles that have the Caterpillar® dieselengine you may have an exhaust restrictor thatwill operate in High Idle mode. The exhaust brakeswitch must be on for this feature to operate.See Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake on page 109 formore information.

Idle speed will then return to normal under any ofthe following conditions:

• The engine reaches the preset operatingtemperature or has been operating for at least10 minutes.

• The brake pedal is pressed.

• The manual transmission clutch pedal ispressed or, if the vehicle has automatictransmission, it is shifted from NEUTRAL (N)or PARK (P).

• The vehicle speed exceeds about5 mph (8 km/h).

• The throttle is pressed.

Exhaust Restrictor(Engine Warm-Up)

Exhaust RestrictorIf your vehicle has a Isuzu 6H or Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine, it may have a feature calledan Exhaust Restrictor (NPE), which uses an airactuated valve in the exhaust system to restrictexhaust gas flow which enhances the engine andheater warm-up.

Automatic Quick Warm-UpIf your vehicle has a DURAMAX® 6600 engine, ithas a feature called an Automatic Quick Warm-Up,which uses the turbocharger to restrict the exhaustgas flow which enhances the engine and heaterwarm-up.

In both systems, exhaust restrictor or automaticquick warm-up, the cold temperature highidle feature elevates the engines idle speed, up to1500 rpm, and restricts the exhaust gas flow,when outside temperatures are below 32°F (0°C),and the engine coolant temperature is belowcertain levels. This feature enhances heaterperformance by raising the engine coolanttemperature faster.

105

For all engines this feature is already turned on.The automatic quick warm-up on the DURAMAX®

engine can be turned off and on by doing thefollowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the vehicle off.

2. Press the accelerator pedal to the floorand hold it while quickly pressing andfully releasing the brake pedal three times inless than eight seconds.

3. Release the accelerator pedal and start theengine. The green exhaust brake/restrictorlight below the radio controls will be litfor 10 seconds.If this feature is turned off, by doing theprocedure described previously, and then theengine is started, the exhaust brake/restrictorlight will flash for 10 seconds and then itwill turn off.

When the engine is started, it will slowly increaseto the high idle speed after a delay of a fewseconds; up to about two minutes. For this methodto work properly there must be no throttle orbrake pedal faults, and the throttle pedal must notfall below 75 percent of wide open throttle whilepressing the brake pedal.

The engine idle speed will return to normal oncethe following conditions are met:

• Once engine coolant temperature reachesabout 150°F (65°C).

• The intake temperature reaches a certain level.

The high idle speed will be temporarily interruptedand the engine speed will return to normal ifany of the following conditions occur:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The accelerator pedal is pressed.

• The automatic transmission is shifted out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

• The clutch pedal on the manual transmissionis pressed.

• Vehicle speed is detected.

Once these conditions no longer exist, the engineidle speed will slowly increase to high idle afterthe normal delay, if the conditions for enginecoolant temperature and air intake temperatureare still met.

106

Engine Checks Before OperatingWhen you have started your engine, let it run for20 to 30 seconds before you put a load on theengine. But do not leave the vehicle whilethe engine is running.

Avoid unnecessary idling of diesel engineequipped vehicles.

If the engine idles too long, the temperature of theengine coolant will fall below the normal operatingrange. Low engine operating temperaturecauses several conditions which affect engineoperation and reduce engine life.

The engine should be permitted to go through awarm-up period. Operate the vehicle at a minimumof 600 rpm during the warm-up period. Duringthis period and during operation, the followingobservations should be made.

During this warm-up period, check your warninglights and gages:

• If oil pressure does not begin to rise within15 seconds of starting, stop the engineand find the cause. See Oil Pressure Gage onpage 173 for more information.

• If the engine coolant temperature gage needlegoes into the hot area on the gage, stop theengine and find the cause of the overheating.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 171 for more information.

• If you have air brakes, the dual-needle airpressure gage should read at least 115 psi(790 kPa) for both service systems before youtry to move the vehicle. When air pressure isbelow 60 psi (420 kPa), the LOW AIR light willcome on and you will hear a tone alarm. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 168 formore information. If the pressure does not buildup or drops during warm-up, stop the engineand find the cause before you try to move thevehicle. Recommended air pressure beforedriving is 120 psi (830 kPa). See Air PressureGage on page 181 for more information.

107

• The charging system light should come onwhen the ignition key is turned to RUN orSTART and should go out when the engine isrunning above idle. If the light does not go outor comes back on during normal engineoperation, have the charging system checkedright away. (This light tells you if the generatoris not charging; it does not reflect the conditionof the battery.) See Charging System Light onpage 165 for more information.

• The voltmeter charge indicator gage tells youthe condition of your battery’s charge. The gageshould be in the center area during engineoperation. The red area on the left indicates anundercharge condition; the red area on the rightindicates an overcharge. If the gage is in eitherred area, have the battery and charging systemchecked right away. See Voltmeter Gage onpage 166 for more information.

Notice: Do not allow the engine to operate atlow idle for more than five minutes. Thiscan cause low engine operating temperatureswhich can affect engine operation andreduce engine life. Engine idle speed shouldbe increased to 1200 rpm whenever extendedidle is required. Once started, the engineshould be placed under load to allow theengine coolant temperature to reach 150°F(66°C) before shutting off the engine.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with this feature.

In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater isnot required.

108

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Find the plug-in outlet located under thedriver’s door.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Diesel Engine Exhaust BrakeIf your vehicle has a Isuzu 6H or Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine, it may have an exhaust brake,which is located in the exhaust system.

If your vehicle has a 6.6L DURAMAX® 6600Diesel Engine, it may have an exhaust brake,which is controlled through the turbocharger.

The exhaust brake for both engines operatesthe same.

109

The exhaust brakeswitch is located in theinstrument panelswitchbank.

Push the bottom of the switch to turn the exhaustbrake on. When you push the top of the switch,the exhaust brake will turn off.

There is an indicator light on the instrument panelsimilar to the symbol on the switch, that willcome on when the exhaust brake is active. SeeExhaust Brake Indicator Light on page 176for more information.

When using the exhaust brake, the proper gearrange selection is important. The exhaust brake willbe most effective if the gear range selected is thelowest possible range that does not allow theengine rpm to go more than 200 rpm above rated(full load) rpm. If you have a Caterpillar® DieselEngine, do not exceed 2900 rpm. If you have aIsuzu 6H Diesel engine, do not exceed 2550 rpm. Ifyou have a DURAMAX® 6600 Diesel Engine, do notexceed 3600 rpm.

If your vehicle has an Allison®

1000/2200/2300/2500 series automatictransmission and press this button, thetransmission will downshift to a factory defaultsetting of third gear. To change the default setting,or for more information on factory defaultsettings, contact your dealer for assistance.

The accelerator and clutch pedals must bereleased in order for the exhaust brake to engage.The exhaust brake will automatically shut offwhen the anti-lock brake system is active.

If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® Diesel Engine ora DURAMAX® 6600 Diesel Engine, the exhaustbrake will become active in cruise controlwhen you exceed the set speed by 3 to 5 mph.

110

Two-Speed Rear Axle ElectricShift ControlIf your vehicle has this feature, you will find a labelon the headliner above the windshield or inanother place near the driver that shows how touse it. Be sure to follow the directions carefully.

Use the following directions based on the type ofshift control the vehicle has.

The rear axle shiftcontrol switch for amanual transmission islocated on the shift lever.

When the switch is down, the rear axle is in thehigh range. When the switch is up the rear axle isin low range. Push or pull the switch to changethe range.

The two-speed axle control should be in the upposition or low range when you park the vehicle.You will need to engage the transmission andmove the vehicle a little to assure the axle is in thelow range. Then apply the parking brake, shiftinto NEUTRAL and shut off the engine.

Also, always start the vehicle in motion with thetwo-speed axle in the low range.

To shift up from low to high, do the following:

1. Move the switch down for the high range.

2. Disengage the clutch.

3. After a brief pause, engage the clutch andthen press down on the accelerator pedaluntil the axle engages.

To shift down from high to low, do the following:

1. Release the accelerator and move theswitch upward for low range.

2. Press the accelerator pedal slowly until theaxle engages.

111

Air Shift Control (AutomaticTransmission)

The rear axle shiftcontrol switch for anautomatic transmissionis located in theinstrument panelswitchbank.

To use the rear axle shift control, press the bottomof the switch to get to the high range. The switchindicator light will come on when the vehicle is inthe high range. Press the top of the switch to returnto the low range.

The two-speed axle should be in low range whenyou park the vehicle. You will need to engagethe transmission and move the vehicle a little toassure the axle is in range. Then shift intoPARK (P), apply the parking brake, and shut offthe engine.

To shift up from low to high range while driving,press the bottom of the rear axle shift controlswitch as you are releasing the accelerator pedal.After the shift has occurred, apply the acceleratoras desired.

To shift from high to low range while driving, pressthe top of the rear axle shift control switch asyou release the accelerator pedal. Press theaccelerator pedal slowly until the down shift hasoccurred, then apply the accelerator as desired.

For better performance during off-road or under aheavy load, shift the axle into low range andthen operate the transmission normally.

For better performance on the highway, shift theaxle to high range and operate the transmissionnormally.

112

Automatic Transmission OperationWe build vehicles with Allison® five andsix-speed automatic transmissions. This part ofthe manual covers the basics of these. With thesetransmissions, you will find another Allison®

manual in your vehicle that goes into more detail.On the headliner, in front of and above thedriver, or in some other place near the driver, youwill see a label that describes important operatingfacts about the automatic transmission in yourvehicle. Make sure you follow the instructions onthis label.

Be sure to keep your parking brake set until youare ready to shift into DRIVE (D), and pressthe brake pedal while shifting from NEUTRAL (N)or PARK (P) to a drive gear.

All vehicles equipped with automatic transmissionscan be started in PARK (P), if equipped, or inNEUTRAL (N). See the Allison® TransmissionOperator’s Manual in your vehicle for moreinformation about this.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle without the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

113

Overdrive DefeatIf your vehicle has this feature, you can select notto shift up to fifth gear. This is useful whentowing or under a heavy load.

The overdrive defeatswitch is located in theinstrument panel tothe right of thesteering column.

Press the switch to limit the transmission tofourth gear. This will allow for fewer downshiftswhile pulling a trailer or under a heavy load. Theindicator light in the switch will come onwhenever overdrive defeat is active.

Manual Transmission Operation

Using the ClutchWhen you are starting to move the vehicle, it isimportant to begin with the engine speed atidle. Then start to engage the clutch and listen foran engine speed drop of about 100 rpm. At thispoint, the clutch is engaging, so you shouldincrease the engine speed and fully engage theclutch. It is important not to increase theengine speed sooner or before the clutch beginsits engagement. If you do, you can cause damageto your vehicle.

Double-ClutchingYou must use the double-clutching method whenyou shift an unsynchronized gear set. Disengagethe clutch, shift to NEUTRAL and engage theclutch. When upshifting, slow the engine until theengine rpm and road speed match. Whendownshifting, accelerate the engine until theengine rpm and road speed match. Then quicklydisengage the clutch and move the shift leverto the next gear position and engage the clutch.

114

Eaton® Fuller® Five and Six-SpeedTransmissions and TTC SpicerSeven-Speed TransmissionsThese transmissions have gears that automaticallysynchronize when you shift up or down (exceptFIRST (1) gear on the five-speed and seven-speedtransmission which is unsynchronized). Choosethe gear that will maintain the road speed you wantwhile keeping the engine above two-thirds of thegoverned speed. When the engine speeddrops below two-thirds of the governed speed,shift into the next lower gear before your enginebegins to lug. When you shift down, be sureto double-clutch if required.

Eaton® Fuller® Nine and Ten-SpeedNon-Synchronized ManualTransmissionsIf your vehicle has one of these transmissions theengine rpm and road speed must match whenupshifting and downshifting. The label above thewindshield will tell you the operating basicsyou need to know.

The following are driving tips.

• Always choose an initial starting gear suitablefor the load and terrain.

• Always use double-clutching procedureswhen shifting.

• Never move the range shift lever to theLO speed gear position after HI rangepreselection, or anytime the transmission is inthe HI range.

• Never move the range knob or lever withthe shift lever in NEUTRAL while the vehicleis moving.

• Never make a range shift while moving inREVERSE (R).

115

Clutch Brake (Vehicles withNon-Synchronized Transmission)A clutch brake is used to stop transmission inputshaft rotation so that FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R)gear selection can be initiated when the vehicle isat a standstill and the engine is idling.

Press the clutch pedal all the way down to thefloorboard to apply the clutch brake.

When using the clutch brake, disengage the clutchpedal and shift the transmission into either theinitial starting gear or REVERSE (R). If thetooth-butting occurs between the clutching teeth,re-engage the clutch while applying light pressureto the shift lever. This will provide for a smoothshift into either FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R) gear.

Notice: Using the clutch brake for shiftinginto any gear other than FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R) may cause premature wear ofthe clutch brake and make gear shift effortmore difficult. Do not use the clutch brake forshifting after engaging FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R).

Power Take-Off (PTO)

If your vehicle isequipped for theaddition of a PTO, thisfactory installedswitch will be located inthe instrument panel.

When the PTO switch is in the ON position,engine speed is limited to maximum PTO speed ifPTO is activated during driving; thereforelimiting overall vehicle speed.

Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s orinstaller’s instructions.

116

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can sendthe engine’s driving power to all four wheels forextra traction. To get the most satisfactionout of four-wheel drive, you must be familiar withits operation. Read the part that follows beforeusing four-wheel drive. You should use two-wheeldrive high for most normal driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavementin four-wheel drive for an extended period oftime can cause premature wear on yourvehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean,dry pavement in four-wheel drive for extendedperiods of time.

Locking Hubs

Turn the dial of the hublock (A) from the Freeposition to the Lock position to lock the front axle.

Turn the dial of the hublock (A) from the Lockposition to the Free position to unlock the axle.

You do not have to back the vehicle up todisengage the hublocks.

Hublock Dial Location Hublock Dial

117

If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive, thetransfer case knobis located to the right ofthe steering wheelon the instrument panel.Use this knob to shiftinto and out offour-wheel drive.

An indicator light shows you which position thetransfer case is in. The indicator lights come onbriefly when you turn on the ignition and one stayson. If the lights do not come on, you should takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicatorlight flashes while shifting the transfer case. It willremain on when the shift is complete. If for somereason the transfer case cannot make a requestedshift, it returns to the last chosen setting.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Towing Your Vehicle on page 237 for furtherinformation.

2m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for drivingin most street and highway situations. Thetransfer case does not drive the front axle intwo-wheel drive. The front-axle spins if the frontwheel hubs are locked. Be sure to unlock the hubsto achieve the best fuel economy.

4m (Four-Wheel High): Use Four-Wheel Highwhen you need extra traction, such as on snowy oricy roads or in most off-road situations. Be surethe front wheel hubs are locked when you want todrive in Four-Wheel High.

118

4n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting sendsmaximum power to all four wheels. You mightchoose Four-Wheel Low if you are driving off-roadin deep sand, deep mud, and climbing ordescending steep hills. Be sure the front wheelhubs are locked when you want to drive inFour-Wheel Low.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even ifthe transmission is in PARK (P). You orsomeone else could be injured. If youare going to leave your vehicle, set theparking brake and shift the transmissionto PARK (P) and make sure the transfercase is in a drive gear.

Notice: If your vehicle has an Allison®

transmission and you try to put thetransmission in PARK (P) while the transfercase is in Four-Wheel Low, the transmissionmight not go into PARK (P) and could damageyour vehicle. When parking your vehicle,make sure the transfer case is in Two-WheelHigh or Four-Wheel High.

NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel HighTurn the knob to four-wheel high. This can bedone at 3 mph or less, while you are shifting outof Four-Wheel Low. The indicator light flasheswhile shifting. It remains on after the shift iscomplete. Be sure to lock your front hubs.

119

Shifting Into Two-Wheel HighTurn the knob to Two-Wheel High. This can bedone at 3 mph or less, while you are shifting out ofFour-Wheel Low.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel LowTo shift to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle’s enginemust be running and the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferredmethod for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is to haveyour vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).Turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low. You mustwait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stopflashing and remain on before shifting thetransmission into gear. Be sure to lock thefront hubs.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator lighthas stopped flashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoid damaging yourvehicle, always wait for the Four-WheelDrive Low indicator light to stop flashingbefore shifting the transmission into gear.

If you turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low while yourvehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-WheelLow indicator light flashes for 30 seconds anddoes not complete the shift unless your vehicle ismoving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds,the transfer case returns to the setting lastchosen. If your vehicle is in gear and moving lessthan 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the transfer case shiftsto Four-Wheel High.

120

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel LowTo shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel Highor Two-Wheel High, your vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) withthe transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and theengine running. The preferred method for shiftingout of Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehiclemoving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knobto Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel High or Two-WheelHigh indicator light to stop flashing and remainon before shifting the transmission into gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel Highindicator light has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case. To help avoiddamaging your vehicle, always wait for theFour-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High indicatorlight to stop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

If the knob is turned to Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High while your vehicle is in gearand/or moving, the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheelhigh indicator light flashes for 30 seconds. It willnot complete the shift unless your vehicle ismoving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N).

121

Shifting Into NEUTRALBefore shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, firstmake sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.

5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way pastFour-Wheel Low and hold it there for aminimum of 10 seconds. The NEUTRALindicator light comes on.

6. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmission toDRIVE (D) for one second.

7. Turn the ignition to OFF.

8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK. (P).

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desiredshift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, Four-Wheel Low).

5. After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL, the indicator light goes out.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Start the engine and shift the transmissionlever to the desired position.

122

Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out ofthe different modes can cause the transfer caseto enter the shift protection mode. This protects thetransfer case from possible damage and onlyallows the transfer case to respond to one shift per10 seconds. The transfer case can stay in thismode for up to three minutes.

Parking

{CAUTION:

If you do not park your vehicle properly, itcan roll. If you have left the enginerunning, it can move very quickly. You orothers could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle will not move, even when you areon level ground, follow the steps below.

Parking a Vehicle With the Two-SpeedRear Axle1. With the engine running, shift the two-speed

rear axle into low. To be sure it is in low, youwill need to move the vehicle in gear just a little.

2. Hold the regular brake pedal down with yourright foot.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL formanual transmission or PARK (P) forautomatic transmission.

123

Parking Brake (With HydraulicBrakes)If your vehicle has hydraulic brakes, it has either aparking brake foot pedal or hand lever. If youhave the parking brake foot pedal, it is locatedbelow the instrument panel to the left of thesteering column.

If you have the parking brake hand lever, it islocated to the right of the driver, on the floor.

To set the foot pedal parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down with your right foot. Pushdown the parking brake pedal with your left foot.

To set the hand lever parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down with your right foot. Pullup on the handle with your right hand, until it stops.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is set,the brake system warning light will come on.

To release the foot pedal parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down. Pull the brake releasehandle, located just above the parking brake pedal,to release the parking brake.

To release the hand lever parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down and push down onthe handle until it stops.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light willgo off.

Parking Brake Hand Lever Shown

124

Parking Brake (with Air Brakes)

If your vehicle has airbrakes, you will have thisparking brake. It islocated above the radioin the instrument panel.

Pulling it out applies the parking brake. Theparking brake light will come on when the airparking brake is applied.

Vehicles built for use as tractors or towingvehicles have two air brake controls. They looklike this:

{CAUTION:

When the yellow PARKING BRAKE andthe red TRAILER AIR SUPPLY knobs areboth pushed in, your rig will be free tomove. It could strike someone orsomething. When both of these knobs arepushed in, hold the regular brake pedaldown to keep your rig from moving.

125

To charge a trailer’s air brake system do thefollowing:

1. Move your vehicle into the proper position.

2. Apply the parking brake by pulling the yellowparking brake knob out.

3. Hook up the trailer air system properly.

4. Get into the vehicle.

5. Push and hold down the regular brake pedal.

6. Push in both the yellow parking brake andthe red trailer air supply knobs. This willcharge your trailer’s air system.

After a few minutes, the trailer system should befully charged. When it is, the air pressure gage willshow about 125 to 135 psi (862 to 931 kPa).See Air Pressure Gage on page 181 for moreinformation.

For driving with a trailer, the yellow and red, ifequipped, knobs must be pushed in. When you arenot pulling a trailer, the red trailer air supplyknob must be pulled out.

{CAUTION:

If you apply any one of the air brakeparking controls while the vehicle ismoving, your rig will stop suddenly. If youare not ready for this, you or others couldbe injured. Do not apply any one of thesecontrols while you are driving, unless youhave to make an emergency stop.

126

If the air pressure drops below 60 to 70 psi(413 to 482 kPa), the primary brake light andwarning buzzer will come on. If the air pressuredrops to 35 to 45 psi (241 to 310 kPa), thered trailer air supply knob will automatically popout and apply the spring brakes on the trailer.

If the air pressure drops to 35 to 45 psi(241 to 310 kPa), the yellow park brake knobwill automatically pop out and apply the springbrakes on the truck or tractor.

If you ever have a complete loss of air so thatyour air brakes automatically apply, there is a waythat the tow operator can release the parkingbrakes to tow the vehicle. See Towing YourVehicle on page 237.

Parking Brake Burnish ProcedureAll vehicles which have hydraulic brakes will havea parking brake. It is recommended that theparking brake be burnished as part of the newvehicle break-in. The parking brake will work bestafter it has been burnished following theseinstructions:

1. Making sure that there is no other trafficaround, get the vehicle speed up to20 mph (32 km/h) and pull up to apply theparking brake. Let the vehicle come toa complete stop. Apply the base brakes anddisengage the parking brake.

2. Repeat the burnishing procedure in Step 1 atotal of 10 times

3. Between stops, drive the vehicle about2 1⁄2 miles (4 km)

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on candamage the transmission and brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

127

Air SuspensionYour vehicle may have the Hendrickson HASSeries single-axle air suspension which isdesigned for a single-axle on-highway use. Thisfeature is available in 19,000 lb (8 613.3 kg),21,000 lb (9 525.4 kg) and 23,000 lb (10 432.6 kg)capacities.

Rear Air Suspension Dump ControlIf your vehicle is equipped with the HendricksonHAS Series single-axle air suspension, youmay have this control. The air suspension dumpcontrol allows the operator to lower the deck heightapproximately 4.5 inches (11.5 cm) from thenormal frame height.

The switch to deflateand inflate the airsuspension is located inthe instrument panel.

Press the bottom of the switch to deflate the airsuspension and lower the deck height. Pressthe top of the switch to return the suspension tonormal deck height.

An indicator light will come on and stay onwhenever the switch is in the dumped position.

128

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

129

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

130

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 130.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 227.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move.

131

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorIf your vehicle has this feature, pull the tabunder the mirror toward you to reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you after dark. Pushthe tab away from you to restore the mirror to thedaytime position.

Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors so you cansee a little of the side of your vehicle, and the areabeside your vehicle from a comfortable drivingposition. All mirrors can be folded in to enternarrow passageways.

Outside Power MirrorsIf you have outside power mirrors, they can beadjusted from the inside of the vehicle.

The control for thisfeature is located on thedriver’s door.

Select the mirror you want to move by turning theswitch clockwise to adjust the passenger’s sidemirror, or counterclockwise to adjust the driver’sside mirror. The center position is neutral.

Then, adjust the mirror by pressing the outerarrows on the switch until the mirror is inthe desired position.

132

Outside Convex Mirrors

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away than theyreally are. If you cut too sharply into theright or left lane, you could hit a vehicle.Check your regular outside mirrors (oryour inside mirror, if you have one) beforechanging lanes.

Your vehicle may have convex mirrors on both thedriver’s side and the passenger’s side. They arecurved to allow more to be seen from thedriver’s seat. A convex mirror can make thingslook farther away than they really are.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, your outsiderearview mirrors can be defrosted.

The switch for thisfeature is located inthe instrument panelswitchbank.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn the outsideheated rearview mirrors on. The switch indicatorlight will come on and stay on whenever theoutside heated rearview mirrors are activated.

133

Storage AreasYour vehicle includes a number of storagecompartments.

Some vehicles have storage areas in theinstrument panel. Another small storage area maybe located overhead. Other models may havemore storage area underneath the frontpassenger’s bench seat. Lift the seat cushion touse the storage area.

Your vehicle may have a storage tray locatedbehind the driver and passenger seats.

All models have storage pockets and cupholderson each of the doors. Some models may haveadditional cupholders in the center floor console.

All models also have storage compartmentslocated beneath the floorboard on both sides ofthe vehicle.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a center consolecompartment if you have the bucket orsuspension seats.

The back of your center bench seat may also foldforward to reveal a console compartment.

The release strap forthe center console islocated betweenthe center seat andpassenger’s seat.

To expose the storage compartment, pull thestrap to release the seatback. Then fold theseatback forward.To open the storage compartment, press therelease button and lift the lid rearward. With thelid closed, it can be used as a clipboard tohold papers in place.Before returning the seatback to the uprightposition, make sure the console is snapped shut.Lift the seatback all the way up until it clicks.Push and pull on the seatback to make sure theseat is locked in place.

134

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 138Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 140Other Warning Devices ............................. 140Horn .......................................................... 140Tilt Wheel .................................................. 140Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 141Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 142Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 142Windshield Wipers ..................................... 143Windshield Washer .................................... 144Cruise Control ........................................... 144Exterior Lamps .......................................... 148Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 149Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 149Marker Lamps ........................................... 150Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 151Dome Lamps ............................................. 151Entry Lighting ............................................ 152Reading Lamps ......................................... 152Instrument Panel Switchbank ..................... 152Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 154Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 155

Climate Controls ......................................... 155Climate Control System ............................. 155Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 158Rear Heating System ................................ 159

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 159Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 160Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 161Trip Odometer ........................................... 161Tachometer ............................................... 161Engine Speed Limiter ................................ 161Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 162Safety Belt Reminder Tone ....................... 162Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 163Airbag Off Light ......................................... 164Charging System Light .............................. 165Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 166Service Transmission Warning Light .......... 167Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ................. 167Brake System Warning Light ..................... 168Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 170Trailer Anti-Lock Brake System

Warning Light ........................................ 170

Section 3 Instrument Panel

135

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 171Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 171Wait to Start Indicator ............................... 172Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 172Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 173Low Oil Level Light ................................... 174Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 174Engine Overspeed Warning Light .............. 175Engine Shutdown Warning Light ................ 175Transmission Temperature Gage ............... 176Exhaust Brake Indicator Light .................... 176Differential Lock Indicator Light .................. 177Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 177Highbeam On Light ................................... 178Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 178Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ............... 178Check Gages Warning Light ...................... 179

Fuel Gage ................................................. 179Water in Fuel Warning Light ...................... 180Air Filter Restriction Indicator ..................... 181Air Pressure Gage ..................................... 181Hourmeter Gage ........................................ 182

Audio System(s) ......................................... 182Setting the Time ........................................ 183AM-FM Radio ............................................ 184Radio with Cassette .................................. 186Radio with CD ........................................... 192Theft-Deterrent Feature

(Non-RDS Radios) ................................. 198Radio Reception ........................................ 198Care of the Cassette Tape Player ............. 198Care of Your CDs ..................................... 200Care of the CD Player .............................. 200Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 200Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 200

Section 3 Instrument Panel

136

✍ NOTES

137

Instrument Panel Overview

Automatic Transmission Shown

138

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 158.

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 160.

C. Shift Lever. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 113 or Manual TransmissionOperation on page 114.

D. Air Brake Controls. See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 124 or ParkingBrake (with Air Brakes) on page 125.

E. Transfer Case Controls (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 117. Air Filter Gage(If Equipped). See Air Filter RestrictionIndicator on page 181.

F. Auxiliary Gages. See Warning Lights, Gages,and Indicators on page 159.

G. Exterior Lamp Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 148.

H. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 141.

I. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 140.

J. Audio System(s). See Audio System(s) onpage 182.

K. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 155.

L. Instrument Panel Switchbank. See InstrumentPanel Switchbank on page 152.

M. Airbag Off Switch. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 76.

N. Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 154.

139

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on top ofthe steering column.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornSound the horn by pushing the center of thesteering wheel. If you have the optional air horn, it iscontrolled by a cord that you will find up above andto the left of the driver. The harder you pull on thecord, the louder the air horn will sound. The air hornworks only after your air brake system pressuregets up to about 115 psi (790 kPa). The air horn willwork properly unless the air brake system pressuredrops below 60 psi (415 kPa).

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.

140

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.Then move the wheel to a comfortable positionand release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever located on the left side of the steeringcolumn includes the following:

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 142.

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 142.

• Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers onpage 143.

• Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washeron page 144.

• Cruise Control (Option). See Cruise Controlon page 144.

141

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows don’t flash but just stay on, check the turnsignal flasher and circuit breaker. See Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 342.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check the circuit breaker and forburned-out bulbs.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to highbeam or high to low beam, pull the multifunctionlever all the way toward you, then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

142

Windshield Wipers

You control thewindshield wipers byturning the band with thewiper symbol on it.

9 (Off): Turn the band on the lever to thissymbol to turn off the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to this symbol. Hold it there until the wipersstart, then let go. The wipers will stop afterone cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the bandon mist longer.

You can set the wiper speed for a long or shortdelay between wipes. This can be very usefulin light rain or snow. Turn the band to select thedelay time. The farther the band is turned upward,the longer the delay will be. The farther theband is turned downward, the shorter the delaywill be.

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the bandtoward you to the first solid band below the delaysettings.

For high-speed wiping, turn the band farther, tothe last solid band below the delay settings.To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Ifyour blades do become worn or damaged, getnew blades or blade inserts. For more information,see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 314.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. Thewindshield wiper motor is protected fromoverload by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If themotor overheats due to heavy snow or icethe wiper will stop until the motor cools. Althoughthe circuit is protected from electrical overload,overload due to heavy snow or ice may causewiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavysnow from the windshield before using yourwindshield wipers.

143

Windshield Washer

L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top of themultifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, press the paddle. The wipers will clearthe window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Cruise Control

If your vehicle has thisfeature, it is locatedat the end of themultifunction lever.

T (Set): Pressing in this button at the end ofthe lever sets the cruise control speed.

9 (Off): Moving the switch to this position turnsoff the cruise control.

R (On): Moving the switch to this position turnson the cruise control.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Moving the switch tothis position turns on resume/accelerate.

144

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speeds below about25 mph (40 km/h).

If you have an automatic transmission and youapply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

If you have a manual transmission and youapply your brakes or push the clutch pedal, thecruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Theaccelerator pedal will not go down.

145

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’tneed to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

The vehicle will return to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. So unless you wantto go faster, don’t hold the switch atresume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at thehigher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

146

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlPress in the button at the end of the lever until youreach the lower speed you want, then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, tap thebutton briefly. Each time you do this, you’llgo 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you maywant to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brake orclutch takes you out of cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.

If your vehicle is equipped with the exhaust brakeoption and the exhaust brake is turned on, theexhaust brake may come on and try to slow downthe vehicle to the set cruise control speed if thevehicle has accelerated past the set cruise controlspeed while going downhill.

147

Ending Cruise ControlThere are four different ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual andautomatic transmissions).

• Press the clutch pedal to the floor (manualtransmissions).

• Move the cruise switch to off, or

• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the ignition, your cruise controlset speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The control located to the left of the steeringcolumn operates the exterior lamps.

148

The exterior lamp control has three positions:

OFF: Turning the control to this position turnsoff all lamps except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the parking lamps, togetherwith the following:

• Marker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

O (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

You can switch your headlamps from low to highbeam by pulling the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward you. Pull the lever toward you againto return to low beam.

A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If youhave an electrical overload, your headlampswill flicker on and off. Have your headlamp wiringchecked right away if this ever happens.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you have this system, a tone will sound whenyour headlamps and/or parking lamps areturned on and your ignition is in LOCK orACCESSORY.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your headlamps comeon at reduced brightness when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamp control is off, and

• the parking brake is released.

149

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps willbe on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lampswon’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be litup either.

When it begins to getdark, your DRL indicatorlight is a reminder toturn the headlamps on.The other lamps thatcome on with yourheadlamps, willalso come on.

When you turn the headlamps off, the regularlamps will go off, and your low-beam headlampswill change to the reduced brightness of DRL.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set theparking brake. The DRL will stay off until yourelease the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Marker LampsIf your vehicle has this feature, you can manuallyblink the marker and clearance lamps.

The marker lamp defeatswitch is located in theinstrument panelswitchbank.

Press and hold the bottom of the switch to turn offthe marker and clearance lamps. When yourelease the switch, the marker and clearancelamps will come back on.

150

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature is located to theright of the exterior lamp control.

Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights.When the thumbwheel is moved to the firstposition, the radio display and transmissionselection display will go to full intensity. Theinstrument panel cluster will also be dimlylit. Moving the thumbwheel up to the next positionwill activate the interior dome lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when you opena door.

You can also turn the dome lamps on by movingthe thumbwheel, located to the right of theexterior lamp control, all the way up to the secondposition. In this position, the dome lamps willremain on whether a door is open or closed.

You can use the dome override button to set thedome lamps to automatically come on when adoor is open, or to remain off.

The dome override button is located below theexterior lamp control.

If the dome override button is pushed in, the domelamps will not come on. Use this feature whenyou want to leave your door(s) open for anextended period of time and do not want to runthe battery down.

If the dome override button is in the out position,the interior lamps will work as usual.

151

Entry LightingThe delayed illumination feature will allow you toenter or exit your vehicle with the lights on forabout 20 seconds, after the door is closed or theignition is cycled.

Reading LampsIf your vehicle has reading lamps, press the buttonnext to the lamp to turn the lamp on or off.

Instrument Panel Switchbank

Vehicles Without Four-Wheel Drive

152

This switchbank is located in the center of theinstrument panel.

e (Marker Lamp Defeat Switch): See MarkerLamps on page 150.

j (Manual High Idle Switch): See High IdleSystem on page 104.

i (Traction Control Switch): See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 212.

f (Outside Heated Mirror Switch): See OutsideHeated Mirrors on page 133.

g (Power Take Off Switch): See PowerTake-Off (PTO) on page 116.

h (Rear Air Suspension Dump ControlSwitch): Air Suspension on page 128.

k (Rear Axle Shift Control Switch): See Air ShiftControl (Automatic Transmission) on page 112.

q (Exhaust Brake Switch): See Diesel EngineExhaust Brake on page 109.

l (Differential Lock Control Switch): SeeRear Axle Differential Lock Control on page 211.

c (Airbag On/Off Switch): See Airbag OffSwitch on page 76.

If your vehicle does not have some of the featurescontrolled by these switches, there will be ablank switch marker in its place.

153

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With accessory power outlets, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located on thepassenger’s side of the instrument panel.

To use an outlet, pull the cover down. Whennot using it, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap.

This circuit is protected by a fuse and has amaximum current level.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

154

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and a cigarettelighter located in the center floor console. Toopen the removable ashtray, flip open the top.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the wayand let it go. When it’s ready, it will pop backout by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith these systems, you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, thecontrols will look like this:

Turn the mode knob on the far right clockwise orcounterclockwise to direct the airflow inside ofyour vehicle.

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

155

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

9 (Off): This setting turns the system off.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel vents.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel vents, then directs theremaining air to the floor vents. Cooler air isdirected to the upper vents and warmer air to thefloor vents.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor vents. Use this mode to send air tothe rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under thefront seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.The mode knob can also be used to select thedefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. Toturn the fan off, turn the mode knob on the far rightcounterclockwise to the off position.

Temperature Knob: Turn the middle knob locatedclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside of your vehicle.Turn the knob toward the red area for warmer air.Turn the knob toward the blue area for cooler air.

If your vehicle has air conditioning, the controls willlook like this:

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

< (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn theright knob to this setting for maximum cooling.This setting puts the system in recirculation modeand helps to maximize your air conditioner’sperformance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. Thissetting also cools the air the fastest.

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

156

Y (Air Conditioning): This setting is used fornormal cooling on hot days. It cools outside air anddirects it through the instrument panel vents.

) (Bi-Level Air Conditioning): This settingdivides airflow between the floor vents andinstrument panel vents. The air conditioningcompressor will cycle continuously in this settingas long as the outside temperature is warmenough to activate the compressor.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield andside windows.

Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog ormoisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrostmode to remove fog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield before defrosting.

Turn the mode knob on the right of the climatecontrol panel to select the defog or defrost mode.

- (Defog): With this setting, the outside aircomes out of both the floor and defroster outlets.Adjust the temperature knob for warmer orcooler air. The air conditioning compressor mayoperate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

0 (Defrost): This setting operates the defroster.Most of the air comes out near the windshield,with some going to the floor outlets and front sidewindows. The air conditioning compressor mayoperate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

The defog setting is useful for cold weather with alarge number of passengers or very humidconditions to help keep the windshield clear. Usedefrost to remove fog or ice from the windshieldquickly in extremely cold conditions. Thetemperature knob should be in the red area andthe fan control toward high. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows are clear.

157

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.Be sure to clear as much snow from the rearwindow as possible.

Press this button whichis located near the fancontrol to turn the rearwindow defogger on oroff. An indicator light inthe button will come onwhen the rear windowdefogger is working.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.The rear window defogger will turn off severalminutes after the button is pressed. The defoggercan also be turned off by pressing the buttonagain or by turning off the engine.Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentYour vehicle has air outlets on the instrumentpanel that allow you to adjust the directionand amount of airflow inside the vehicle.

Move the lever on the outlet up or down to directthe airflow. Increase or reduce the amount ofairflow by opening and closing the louvers. Theoutlets can be moved side-to-side to directthe airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction (such asleaves). The heater and defroster will work farbetter, reducing the chance of fogging theinside of your windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, mayaffect the performance of the heating and airconditioning system. Check with yourdealer before adding equipment to the outsideof your vehicle.

158

Rear Heating System

If you have a crew caband your vehicle has arear heater, thethumbwheel for thisfeature is located onthe headliner.

To increase and decrease the flow of heated air tothe rear floor vents, turn the thumbwheel to thedesired fan speed. To turn the fan off, turnthe thumbwheel all the way down.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and evendangerous.

159

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left and many other things you will need to drivesafely and economically.

United States Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine shown, Canada, 6.6L Diesel and Gasoline Engine similar

160

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

While the engine is running, press the resetbutton, located to the right of the trip odometer,to toggle between the trip odometer and theregular odometer. Holding the reset button fortwo seconds while the engine is running and thetrip odometer is displayed, will reset it.

To display the odometer reading with the ignitionoff, press the reset button.

The hourmeter gage is accessed through the tripodometer, for more information see HourmeterGage on page 182.

Tachometer

This gage shows the safe operating range for theengine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

Engine Speed LimiterAll engines have electronic engine speed limiting.The engine limited speeds range between2,900 and 4,400 rpm depending on engineoption content.

7.2L Caterpillar® DieselEngine and Isuzu 6H

Diesel Engines

Gasoline and6.6L DURAMAX®

Diesel Engines

161

Engine Road Speed GovernorThis system controls maximum vehicle speedautomatically and reduces engine poweruntil vehicle speed gets down to maximumgoverned speed.

The default setting for C4500 and C5500models up to 19,500 lbs GVWR is 80 to 85 mph(128 to 136 km/h). Most other models have adefault setting of 75 mph (120 km/h), althoughsome tire sizes and tread patterns may limitmaximum speed to 55 to 65 mph (86 to 105 km/h).You may have a label on the headliner of yourvehicle with more information on your engineroad speed governor. See your GM dealerfor assistance with programming your enginelimited speed.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a lightwill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds.

Safety Belt Reminder ToneIf your vehicle has this feature, when you turnyour key to RUN or START, a tone will sound forseveral seconds to remind people to fastentheir safety belts.

162

Airbag Readiness LightIf your vehicle has airbags, there is an airbagreadiness light on the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol. The system checks theairbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. Thelight tells you if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensors, theairbag modules, the wiring, the passenger airbagsuppression circuit and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information onthe airbag system, see Airbag System on page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN orSTART. If the light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

163

Airbag Off LightIf your vehicle is equipped with an airbag offswitch, when you turn the right front passenger’sairbag off, this light will come on and stay onto remind you that the airbag has been turned off.This light will go off when you turn the airbagon. See Airbag Off Switch on page 76 for more onthis, including important safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group.See Airbag Off Switch on page 76 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.


164

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comeson when you have turned off the airbag, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 76 and Airbag Readiness Light onpage 163 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight may be located inthe instrument panelcluster, or with theauxiliary warning lightsin the center of theinstrument panel.

It should come on briefly when you turn on theignition, before the engine is running, as a check toshow that it is working.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,have your vehicle checked right away. Youcould have a loose generator drive belt or someother problem.

Driving while this light is on will drain your battery.If you must drive a short distance with the lighton, turn off your radio and other accessories.Sustained driving with a generator failure couldresult in a lack of back-up braking if the enginequits or the power steering pump should fail.

165

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine isrunning, the voltmetergage shows thecharging systemvoltage.

Readings in either warning zone indicate apossible problem in the electrical system.

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and the engine is left atan idle for an extended period. This conditionis normal since the charging system may not beable to provide full power at engine idle. As enginespeeds are increased, this condition shouldcorrect itself because higher engine speeds allowthe charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive a short time on the battery.Be sure to shut off the radio, the fan or anyunnecessary accessories and have the systemserviced.

166

Service Transmission Warning LightIf your vehicle has an Allison® automatictransmission, certain transmission malfunctionswill turn this light on.

This light is located withthe auxiliary warninglights in the center of theinstrument panel.

If this light comes on while you are driving, do notuse the transmission shift control or you maylose forward gears. The computer for thetransmission senses a problem and chooses agear to stay in so that you can drive the vehicle inthat gear. You may not be able to drive as fastor back up when this light is on.

Notice: If you continue driving your vehicleafter the transmission warning light comes on,you could damage the transmission. Whilethis light is on, the transmission cannotoperate in all gears. If you attempt to shiftgears, the vehicle may not continue to move.Do not attempt to shift gears while thetransmission warning light is on. Instead, drivedirectly to an authorized dealer for service. Ifyou cannot drive to a dealer immediately, havethe vehicle towed.

Range Inhibit Warning IndicatorIf your vehicle has an Allison 1000/2200/2300/2500 series automatic transmission, a lighted barunder the current gear selected will flash.

If your vehicle has an Allison 3000/3500series automatic transmission, the current gearselected on the pushbutton display will flash.

The flashing bar or gear selection indicates thattransmission range shifts may not occur.

For detailed information on shift inhibit limitations,see the Allison Automatic TransmissionOperator’s Manual in your vehicle for furtherinformation.

167

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle has either hydraulic or air brakes.Each system has different warning lights.

Hydraulic Brake System WarningLightsVehicles with hydraulic brake systems havetwo brake system warning lights on theinstrument panel.

If the BRAKE warninglight comes on, it meansthat the fluid level in themaster cylinder reservoiris low or there is anotherproblem with yourhydraulic brakes.

When it comes on, you will also hear awarning tone.

The BRAKE warning light may come on, and thewarning tone may sound, when you’re turningand braking at the same time. This is normal. See“Hydraulic Brake Systems” under Braking onpage 206.

Parking Brake Warning LightYour vehicle has a brake warning light. When theignition is on, this light will come on when youset your parking brake. The light will stay on if yourparking brake doesn’t release fully.

This light should also come on when you turn theignition key to START. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to remindyou if the parking brake is applied or has notreleased fully.

168

Air Brake System Warning LightVehicles with air brake systems have a brakesystem warning light on the instrument panel.

The LOW AIR warning light should come on, as acheck, whenever you start the engine. However, itis designed to come on, and stay on, when brakereservoir pressure has dropped below 60 psi(410 kPa).

When the warning light comes on while you aredriving, you should drive only as far as the nearestpoint of safety and then stop the vehicle. Here’sa very important thing for you to know:

{CAUTION:

If the air brake system warning lightcomes on and the warning tone sounds,the vehicle can stop suddenly and withoutfurther warning. This is because theparking brake will come on if the pressurefalls below 35 to 45 psi (240 to 310 kPa).You or others could be injured. If the airbrake system warning light comes on andthe warning tone sounds, stop as soon asyou can. You will not know how quicklythe system is losing pressure, so beaware that the parking brake may comeon suddenly.


169

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startyour engine, then it willturn off. This is normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the BRAKEor LOW AIR warning light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but you do not have the anti-lockbrake feature. If the BRAKE and/or LOW AIRwarning light is on, you do not have anti-lockbrakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 168 and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) onpage 208 for more information.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to ON. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

Trailer Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

This light is locatedabove the climatecontrols in the center ofthe instrument panel.

If your vehicle is connected to a trailer withanti-lock brakes, this light should come on briefly,as a check, when you turn on the ignition.

When this light comes on and stays on, it meansthere is something wrong in the trailer anti-lockbrake system. Have the system repairedimmediately.

If an anti-lock brake system equipped trailer is notconnected, this light is not functional.

170

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,your engine coolant might have overheated andyour engine may be too hot. You should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 286. If you havea Caterpillar® diesel engine, also see yourCaterpillar® Operation & Maintenance Manual.

Low Coolant Warning Light

You have a low coolantwarning light. If this lightcomes on, your systemis low on coolant and theengine may overheat.

The warning light should come on briefly, as acheck, when you turn on the ignition.

When it comes on, you will also hear a warningtone at several beats per second for 10 seconds.See Engine Coolant (Gas and DURAMAX®/IsuzuEngines) on page 282 or Engine Coolant(Caterpillar® Diesel Engines) on page 285 andhave your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.

This light may also come on if your vehicle isequipped with the automatic engine shutdownsystem and engine shutdown has begun.See Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown underStarting the Diesel Engine on page 98.


171

Wait to Start IndicatorIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® 6.6L dieselengine, it will have glow plugs and an airintake heater. If your vehicle has the Isuzu 6Hdiesel engine, it will have glow plugs and an inletheater. If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® engine,it will have an inlet heater.

The light in the center ofthe instrument panel willcome on when the inletheater or glow plugs areon and the ignition key isin RUN.

Wait until the indicator light goes off before turningthe ignition key to START.

Malfunction Indicator LampService Engine Soon Light

If this light comes on orflashes while you aredriving, two thingsmay happen.

First, you will not notice any difference in engineperformance, but your tail pipe emissions mayincrease. Second, your engine may not runproperly or may stall without warning. If either ofthese things happen, drive or tow your vehicleto your dealer for service.This light should come on when the ignition is on,but the engine is not running, as a check toshow you it is working. If it does not come on atall, have it repaired.Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

172

Oil Pressure Gage

The engine oil pressure gage, on the lower rightportion of your instrument panel cluster, showsengine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch)or in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may varywith outside temperature and oil viscosity,but readings of 30 to 40 psi (205 to 275 kPa) ongasoline engines at operating temperatureand moderate road speeds are normal. If youhave a diesel engine, the normal operating rangeshould be between 35 and 70 psi (240 to 480 kPa).

A reading in the low pressure zone may becaused by a dangerously low oil level or otherproblem.

If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, also seeyour Caterpillar® Operation & MaintenanceManual.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


173

Low Oil Level Light

Your vehicle may havea low oil level light.

This light should come on as a check, when youstart your engine. If the light fails to come on, haveit repaired as soon as possible so you will beaware when the oil level is low.

Vehicles that have Caterpillar® diesel engines maynot have a low oil level light. In this case, thelight will neither come on as a check when youstart your engine, nor will it come on to indicate alow oil level.

If this light comes on and stays on, it means yourengine is low on oil. You need to check the oillevel right away. See Engine Oil(Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) on page 264 orEngine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 265 orEngine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Engine) onpage 268 for further information.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Change Engine Oil Light

The change engine oillight should come onbriefly as a bulbcheck when you startthe engine. If thelight does not come on,have it serviced.

If the change engine oil light comes on and stays onafter you start the engine, have the oil changed.

174

For additional information on when to changeengine oil for gasoline engines or DURAMAX®

diesel engines, see Engine Oil (Caterpillar® DieselEngine) on page 264 or Engine Oil (GasolineEngine) on page 265 or Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 268 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 363. To reset the changeengine oil light, see Engine Oil Life System(Gasoline Engine) on page 272 or Engine Oil LifeSystem (DURAMAX® Diesel) on page 274 orEngine Oil Life System (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine)on page 276.

Engine Overspeed Warning Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come on ifyour engine is operatingat too many revolutionsper minute (rpm).

It will also come on for a moment as a checkwhen you start your engine.

If it comes on when you’re driving, reduce yourengine speed immediately.

Engine Shutdown Warning Light

If your vehicle has theengine shutdownfeature, this light willcome on when engineshutdown is active.

For more information, see Engine Alarm andAutomatic Shutdown under Starting the DieselEngine on page 98.

175

Transmission Temperature GageIf you have anautomatic transmissionand this gage, it islocated above theswitchbank in thecenter of theinstrument panel.

When your ignition is on, the gage shows thetemperature of the transmission oil. A reading inthe warning zone, the red area beginning at 300°F(150°C), means you must stop driving andcheck into the cause. One possible cause is a lowoil level in the transmission.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle with thetransmission temperature gage above normaloperating range, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead to costly repairsthat would not be covered by your warranty.Do not drive your vehicle while thetransmission temperature gage reading isabove normal. See your dealer for service.

Exhaust Brake Indicator Light

If your vehicle isequipped with anexhaust brake, you willhave this light, locatedabove the climatecontrols in the center ofthe instrument panel.

The exhaust brake indicator light will come on andstay on whenever the diesel engine exhaustbrake or exhaust restrictor is active. For moreinformation, see Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake onpage 109 and Exhaust Restrictor (EngineWarm-Up) on page 105.

176

Differential Lock Indicator Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light islocated in the center ofthe instrument panel.The light is on when therear differential locksystem is in use.

The light will come on momentarily during starting.If the light fails to come on, have it repaired assoon as possible so you will be aware whenthe lock system is in use.

See Rear Axle Differential Lock Control onpage 211 for more information.

Reduced Engine Power Light

If the check engine andreduced engine powerlights are on, theelectronic throttle controlmay be disabled, and anoticeable change in thevehicle’s performancemay occur.

If the reduced engine power light is on, but thereis no change in performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a slower speed while the reducedengine power light is on, but accelerationand speed may be limited.

Anytime the check engine light stays on, thevehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer assoon as possible for service.

177

Highbeam On LightThis light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 142.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster. It goes onwhenever the DaytimeRunning Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 149for more information.When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator lightis a reminder to turn on your headlamps.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light


This light will come on when your vehicle is low onwindshield washer fluid.

For more information, see Windshield WasherFluid on page 293.

178

Check Gages Warning Light

This light will come onas you’re starting theengine, just as a check.

If this light comes on and stays on while you aredriving. It means that either your engine coolanttemperature gage or your engine oil pressure gagemay be showing a reading in the warning zone.

When the check gages light comes on, youwill also hear a warning tone. The tone and thelight will stay activated until the problem iscorrected.

This light may also come on if your vehicle isequipped with the optional automatic engineshutdown system and engine shutdown hasbegun. See Engine Alarm and AutomaticShutdown under Starting the Diesel Engine onpage 98.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage islocated on the right sideof your instrumentpanel cluster.

When the ignition is on, your fuel gage lets youknow about how much fuel you have left. When thegage first shows empty, you’ll still have a little fuelleft, but you should get more fuel soon.

If your vehicle has dual fuel tanks, the reading onthe gage is the total fuel left in both tanks.

179

Here are four concerns of some operators. Noneof these shows a problem with your fuel gage:

• The gage moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage does not go back to empty whenyou turn off the ignition.

• At the gas station, the pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated.


Water in Fuel Warning Light


If your vehicle has the 6.6L DURAMAX® or Isuzu6H diesel engine, this light will come on towarn you that there is water in the fuel system.

For more information on how this light works, seeWater in Fuel on page 252.

180

Air Filter Restriction Indicator

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the gage islocated above theswitchbank in the centerof the instrumentpanel. It monitors theengine air filter.

As the filter gets dirty, the yellow indicator willbegin to rise. When it reaches 25 inches ofvacuum on the scale, the filter should be replaced.

After replacing the filter, reset the gage bypressing in the yellow reset button at the bottomof the gage.


Air Pressure GageIf your vehicle has airbrakes, the air pressuregage is located abovethe switchbank inthe center of theinstrument panel.

This gage shows the air pressure for both yourfront and rear brake systems.If the needle on the gage indicates that the airpressure is below 60 to 75 psi (415 to 517 kPa),the low air warning light will come on. An alarm willalso sound if this happens.The top pointer shows the pressure available forthe front system, while the bottom pointershows pressure for the rear. There should be nomore than 4 psi (28 kPa) difference showingbetween the systems.Don’t drive until both pointers are showing at least120 psi (827 kPa), so you’ll have enough air ifyou need to apply your brakes.

181

Hourmeter GageTo access the engine hourmeter gage, press thetrip odometer button three times.

The instrument panel cluster displays theaccumulated engine run time hours using thereconfigurable odometer display. The engine runtime hours displays only when the ignition is in theLOCK or ACCESSORY position and the tripreset button is pressed for about four seconds.The value of the accumulated hours doesnot change when the battery is disconnected.

The hourmeter resets to 0.0 when 10,000 hoursare accumulated. The instrument panel clusterbegins to reaccumulate the engine run time hoursfrom 0.0 hours.

Audio System(s)If your vehicle came without a radio, the wiringprovisions for a radio and an antenna wereinstalled at the assembly plant, so that if you want,a radio can be installed at the dealer.

Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 202. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

182

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 202.Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it.

Setting the TimePress and hold the HR (down) or MIN (up) arrowfor two seconds. Then press HR until thecorrect hour appears on the display. Press andhold MIN until the correct minute appears onthe display. The time can be set with the ignitionon or off.

183

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency, band,and the time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

oSEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrowfor two seconds until a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds untiltwo beeps sound. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the next preset station. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

184

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press andrelease AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE (treble)displays. Then press and hold the up or the downarrow to increase or to decrease the tone. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble). Then press andhold AUDIO for more than two seconds until abeep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or T (treble)and a zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit out of audiomode by pressing another button, causing the radioto perform that function or wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, press and releaseAUDIO until BAL (balance) displays. Then pressand hold the up or the down arrow to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD(fade) displays. Then press and hold the up or thedown arrow to move the sound toward the frontor the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FAD. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade) and azero displays.

185

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit out of audiomode by pressing another button, causing the radioto perform that function or wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.

Fade might not be available if the vehicle is aregular cab model.

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALdisplays it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for your vehicle and must bereturned to your dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio with Cassette

Playing the Radio


VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

186

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, and AM. The display shows the selection.



To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEKarrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds andflashes the station frequency, then goes to the nextstation. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold one of theSEEK arrows for more than four seconds until youhear two beeps. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a fewseconds and flashes the station frequency, thengoes to the next preset station. Press one of theSEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:




4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

187

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press andrelease AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE (treble)appears on the display. Then press and holdthe up or the down arrow to increase or todecrease. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIOfor more than two seconds until you hear abeep. B and a zero or T and a zero appears onthe display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, end out of audio bywaiting for the display to change to the clockdisplay. Then press and hold AUDIO for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep. CEN (center)appears on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, press and releaseAUDIO until BAL (balance) appears on the display.Then press and hold the up or the down arrowto move the sound toward the right or theleft speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, press and release AUDIO untilFAD (fade) appears on the display. Then pressand hold the up or the down arrow to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.L (balance) and a zero or F and a zero appears onthe display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, end out of audio bywaiting for the display to change to the time display.Then press and hold AUDIO for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep. CEN (center)appears on the display.

Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regularcab model.

188

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibration): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL appears on the display it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand must be returned to your dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a Cassette TapeThe tape player is built to work best with tapesthat are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.Tapes longer than that are so thin they may notwork well in this player. The longer side withthe tape visible should face to the right. If you hearnothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape maynot be in squarely. Press the eject button toremove the tape and start over.

If the ignition and the radio are off, press the ejectbutton or the RCL knob to insert and to beginplay of a tape. If the ignition is on and the radio isoff, the tape can be inserted and begins playing.CAS (cassette) appears on the display whena tape is inserted.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO,and SEEK controls just as you do for theradio. The radio displays UP if the top side of thetape is playing. DN (Down) appears if thebottom side is playing. The tape player plays theother side of the tape when it reaches the end.

Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD playersworks in the cassette tape player. See “CDAdapter Kits” later for more information.

The tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.

If an error appears on the display, see “CassetteTape Messages” later in this section.

189

1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each selectionfor previous to work. Press this pushbutton togo to the previous selection on the tape ifthe current selection has been playing for lessthan three seconds. If pressed when thecurrent selection has been playing from three to13 seconds, it goes to the beginning of theprevious selection or the beginning of the currentselection, depending on the position on thetape. If pressed when the current selection hasbeen playing for more than 13 seconds, it goes tothe beginning of the current selection. Pressingthis pushbutton multiple times increases thenumber of selections to be searched back, up to−9. Pressing the NEXT pushbutton cancelsthe selections.

2 NEXT: The tape must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each selectionfor next to work. Press this pushbutton to goto the next selection on the tape. Pressing thispushbutton multiple times in the next modeincreases the number of selections to besearched forward. Pressing the PREVpushbutton cancels the selections.

3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton toquickly reverse the tape. FR appears on thedisplay. The radio plays while the tape reverses.Press it again to return to playing speed.Select stations during reverse operation by usingthe TUNE or SEEK controls or by using thescan or preset scan features.

4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton toquickly advance the tape. FF appears onthe display. The radio plays while the tapeadvances. Press this pushbutton again to return toplaying speed. Select stations during forwardoperation by using the TUNE or SEEK controls orby using the scan or preset scan features.

5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the otherside of the tape.

6 RPT (Repeat): The tape must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each selectionfor repeat to work. Press and release thispushbutton to hear a selection over again. RPTappears on the display. Press this pushbuttonagain to turn off repeated play. OFF appears onthe display.

190

oSEEK p: The tape must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each selectionfor seek to work. The left arrow is the same as thePREV pushbutton and the right arrow is the sameas the NEXT pushbutton. If either arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the tape.

AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a tape is playing. The inactive tape remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tapewhen listening to the radio. CAS appears onthe display when a tape is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape.Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassettetapes can be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages

ERR (Error): If the player detects a tight orbroken tape, this message appears on the displayand the player ejects the tape. The radio goesback to playing the last station selected.

CLN (Clean): If this message appears on thedisplay, the cassette tape player needs tobe cleaned. It still plays tapes, but it should becleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage tothe tapes and player. See Care of the CassetteTape Player on page 198.

If the cassette is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good cassette.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

191

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD playeradapter kit with the cassette tape player afterdeactivating the tight/loose tape sensor featureon the tape player.

To deactivate this feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE button fortwo seconds until one beep is produced. CASflashes, indicating that the TIGHT/LOOSETAPE sensor feature is no longer active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.

The override feature remains active until the ejectbutton is pressed.

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio


VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

192

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, and AM. The display shows the selection.



To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrowfor two seconds until you hear a beep. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds until youhear two beeps. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the next preset station. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations, with astrong signal, that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:




4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, pressand release the AUDIO button until BAS (bass) orTRE (treble) appears on the display. Thenpress and hold the up or the down arrow toincrease or to decrease. If a station is weak orhas static, decrease the treble.

193

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BAS or TRE. Then press and hold theAUDIO button for more than two seconds until youhear a beep. B and a zero or T and a zeroappears on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first end outof audio mode by pressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that function, or by waitingfive seconds for the display to return to the time ofday. Then press and hold the AUDIO button formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.CEN (center) appears on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, press and release theAUDIO button until BAL (balance) appears onthe display. Then press and hold the up orthe down arrow to move the sound toward theright or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release the AUDIO buttonuntil FAD (fade) appears on the display. Thenpress and hold the up or the down arrow to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FAD. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until you heara beep. L (balance) and a zero or F and azero appears on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first end outof audio mode by pressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that function, or by waitingfive seconds for the display to return to the time ofday. Then press and hold the AUDIO button formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.CEN appears on the display.

Fade may not be available if the vehicle is aregular cab model.

194

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibration): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL appears on the display it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand must be returned to your dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot becorrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. CD appears on the display. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off, first press theeject button or the RCL knob.

If you insert a CD with the radio off and theignition on, it starts to play.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 200 formore information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

195

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to goto the beginning of the current track if morethan eight seconds have played. The track numberappears on the display. If this pushbutton isheld or pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving backward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the nexttrack. The track number appears on the display.If this pushbutton is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving forwardthrough the CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RND appears on the display. Press RDM again toturn off random play. OFF appears on the display.

6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once tohear a track over again. RPT appears on thedisplay. The current track continues to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. OFFappears on the display.

196

oSEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow togo to the next or to the previous track. Thetrack number appears on the display. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once,the player continues moving backward or forwardthrough the CD.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the currenttrack number or how long the current track hasbeen playing.

AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD: Press this button to play a CD when listeningto the radio. CD appears on the display if a CDis loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition andradio off if this button is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

197

Theft-Deterrent Feature(Non-RDS Radios)THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved toa different vehicle, it will not operate and LOC willappear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

Care of the Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularlycan cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettesor a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their cases away fromcontaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate properlyor may cause failure of the tape player.

198

The tape player should be cleaned regularly afterevery 50 hours of use. The radio may display CLNto indicate that the tape player has been used for50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. Ifthis message appears on the display, the cassettetape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possibleto prevent damage to the tapes and player. If thereis a reduction in sound quality, try a known goodcassette to see if the tape or the tape player is atfault. If this other cassette has no improvement insound quality, clean the tape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action,non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleanercassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through your dealer.

The cut tape detection feature of the cassette tapeplayer may identify the cleaning cassette as adamaged tape. To prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE button fortwo seconds until the radio produces one beep.CAS will flash on the display for five seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after themanufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.After the cleaning cassette is ejected, thecut tape detection feature will be active again.

A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner whichuses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tapehead can be used. This type of cleaning cassettewill not eject on its own. A non-scrubbingaction cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as thescrubbing type cleaner. The use of anon-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette isnot recommended.

After the player is cleaned, press and hold theeject button for three seconds to reset theCLN indicator. The radio will display --- to showthe indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the soundquality may degrade over time. Always make surethe cassette tape is in good condition beforethe tape player is serviced.

199

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand mostvehicle washes without being damaged. If the mastshould ever become slightly bent, straighten itout by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition onand the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, and HI willappear on the radio display. To change back to thedefault or normal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The volume level will changefrom the loud level to normal, and LO will appear onthe radio display. Each time the chime volume ischanged, three chimes will sound as an example ofthe new volume selected. Removing the radio andnot replacing it with a factory radio or chime modulewill disable vehicle chimes.

200

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 202Defensive Driving ...................................... 202Drunken Driving ........................................ 203Control of a Vehicle .................................. 206Braking ...................................................... 206Hydraulic Brake Systems ........................... 207Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 208Braking in Emergencies ............................. 209Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve .............. 210Rear Axle Differential Lock Control ............ 211Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 212Steering .................................................... 213Off-Road Recovery .................................... 215Passing ..................................................... 216Loss of Control .......................................... 217

Driving at Night ......................................... 219Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 220City Driving ............................................... 223Freeway Driving ........................................ 224Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 225Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 226Winter Driving ........................................... 227If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 232Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 232Tow Hooks ................................................ 233Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 234Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ... 236

Towing ........................................................ 237Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 237Trailer Connections ................................... 239

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

201

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 21.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

202

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

203

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

204

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

205

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 168.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration.But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; theweight of the load; and the amount of brakeforce applied.

206

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Hydraulic Brake SystemsIf your engine stops running, or if your primarybrake system stops working, your vehiclehas a reserve power assist system to help youslow down. Just slowly and steadily applythe brake pedal until you can safely get off theroad. The pedal will seem harder to pushdown. Do not pump the pedal; the system will notwork well or at all that way.

You may find that the steering wheel seems hardto turn when you are turning and braking atthe same time. Also, the primary brake warninglight may come on and the warning tone maysound. This is normal because the main hydraulicbrake system and power steering both use thepower steering pump.If this ever happens, let upon the brake pedal a little. When you let up onthe brake pedal in that situation, it lets the steeringget a little more help from the pump.

207

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 170.

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

208

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes pulsate, or you may hearair exhausting if you have air brakes, but this isnormal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

209

Trailer Brake Hand Control ValveIf your vehicle has this feature, the controlis mounted on the floor console.

This feature lets youapply the trailer brakeswithout applying thetractor brakes.

You can apply the trailer brakes a little or applythem all the way if you have to. Use this control onlywhen you are driving. Do not use it for parking or tohold the rig on a hill.

{CAUTION:

Using the trailer brake hand control forparking or for holding the vehicle on a hillmay not keep the vehicle from rolling.This can happen if someone hits the valveby accident, or if air pressure bleeds fromthe system. If the vehicle rolls, you orothers could be injured. To park thevehicle or hold it on a hill, use the parkingbrake properly.

210

Rear Axle Differential Lock Control

If your vehicle has acontrolled traction orlocking differential axle,the switch is locatedin the center ofthe instrument panel.

You’ll see this control on single rear axle vehicles.

If you’re approaching a slippery surface whereit looks like one or even both wheels may start toslip, you can press the bottom of this switch. Itlocks your rear differential so that power istransmitted equally to both rear wheels.

Let up on the accelerator before you turn on yourrear axle differential lock.

Notice: Turning on the inter-axle differentiallock while the rear wheels are spinningfreely, as they might on snow or ice, candamage the axle(s). Turn on this control onlywhile the wheels are not spinning freely.

Interaxle Differential Lock

This switch is locatedon the center instrumentpanel. You will seethis control on tandemrear axle vehicles.

Press the switch to engage/lock the tandem frontaxle differential to the rear axle differential.This driver controlled feature improves tractionover slippery or uneven surfaces.

211

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction control systemthat limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the rear wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system applies the brake(s)at the affected wheel(s).

The bottom light on the TCS on/off button willcome on when the TCS is limiting wheel spin.You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal. The TCS will function at speeds upto about 25 mph (42 km/h).

The TCS may operate on dry roads under someconditions. When this happens, you may notice areduction in acceleration. This is normal anddoesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.Examples of these conditions include a hardacceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift ordownshift of the transmission or driving onrough roads.

When the light in the top of the TCS button is on,the TCS is off and will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

The light in the top of the TCS button will come onif the TCS is turned off by pressing the TCSon/off button.

The light may also come on if a problem has beendetected in either the traction control system orthe anti-lock brake system.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 232 for moreinformation.

212

To turn the system onor off, press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the instrument panel.

If you used the TCS button to turn the system off,the light in the top of the button will come onand stay on. You can turn the TCS back on at anytime by pressing the button again; the lightshould go off.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

On vehicles with hydraulic brakes, the powersteering and main hydraulic brake system both usethe power steering pump. See Braking on page 206.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

213

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demandtoo much of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 212.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 206. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

214

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

215

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• A vehicle like yours takes a longer time toreach passing speed, so you will need alonger stretch of clear road ahead than youwould with a passenger car.

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back.

216

And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow down anddrop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone isnot trying to pass you as you pull out to passthe slow vehicle.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors and start the leftlane change signal before moving out of theright lane to pass. When you are far enoughahead of the passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror,activate the right lane change signal and moveback into the right lane. Remember that, if yourvehicle’s right outside mirror is convex, thevehicle you just passed may seem to be furtheraway from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

217

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),remember: It helps avoid only the accelerationskid. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 212. If you do not have this system, or if thesystem is off, then an acceleration skid is alsobest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the brakingskid. If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to get thewheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

218

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

219

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction.It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

220

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in goodshape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replaceyour windshield wiper inserts when they showsigns of streaking or missing areas on thewindshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a vehicle wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some vehicle washescan cause problems, too. The water may affectyour brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if youcannot, try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

221

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps and your

marker and clearance lamps, if your vehiclehas them — not just your parking lamps — tohelp make you more visible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 320.

222

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Larger vehicles cannot be driven everywheresmaller ones can. There are low underpasses,truck routes and other special situations.Usually these are well marked, so be sure towatch for the signs.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 224.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

223

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andtry to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it isslower. Stay in the right lane unless you want topass. On some freeways, larger vehicles are notallowed to use some lanes. These places usuallyare well-marked.

224

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed for cars — but not largervehicles — is usually posted. You should gomore slowly.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are.

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

When you drive the vehicle for a long distance,there is something about an easy stretch ofroad with the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in lessthan a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,

with a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

225

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

Here are some tips that can make your drivethrough steep country safer:• Keep the vehicle in good shape. Check all

fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

226

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Use lower gears. Theyhelp cool your engine and transmission, andyou can climb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, winding roads, and special trucklanes. Be alert to these and take appropriateaction.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Be sure the vehicle is in good shape forwinter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 320.

227

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel,a flashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, a pieceof old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properly securethese items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. Butwet ice can be even more trouble because it mayoffer the least traction of all. You can get wet icewhen it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezingrain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet iceuntil salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

228

If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into4HI. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 117.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),it will improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. But you can turn theTCS off if you ever need to. You should turnthe system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck insand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 232.Even though your vehicle has TCS, you willwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theroad conditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the TCS off, such as when drivingthrough deep snow and loose gravel, to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 212.

If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try notto break the fragile traction. If you acceleratetoo fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 208. ABS improves your vehicle’sstability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Whether you have ABS or not,

you will want to begin stopping sooner than youwould on dry pavement. Without ABS, if youfeel your vehicle begin to slide, let up onthe brakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

229

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your mirror arm to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

230

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom around the base of your vehicle if anyis blocking your exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine,make it go a little faster than just idle. That is,push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuelfor the heat that you get and it keeps thebattery (or batteries) charged. You will need awell-charged battery (or batteries) to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run itat a higher speed to get enough heat.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

231

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around the front wheels. If you havea four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 117. If your vehicle hastraction control, you should turn the traction controlsystem off. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 212. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with a manualtransmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after afew tries, it may need to be towed out. If yourvehicle does need to be towed out, see TowingYour Vehicle on page 237.

232

Tow Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straightout. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use tow hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered by warranty.

If your vehicle has tow hooks, the hooks are at thefront and, on some models, the rear of thevehicle. You may need to use them if you arestuck off-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

233

Loading Your VehicleIt is the responsibility of the Final Stagemanufacturer to install a Certification label on yourvehicle. This label shows how much weightyour vehicle can properly carry. It may also showthe size of the vehicle’s original tires, and theinflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The tireinformation could also be shown on a separateTire Information label.

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification label also tells you the maximumweight for the front and rear axles, called theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find outthe actual loads on your front and rear axles, go toa weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Yourdealer can help you with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, spread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

234

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change the weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theygo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

235

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentIf you will be installing a snow plow on yourvehicle, we recommend that the vehicle have thesnow plow prep package (RPO ANQ). Beforeinstalling a snow plow, see your dealer forinformation on other recommended optionalequipment and vehicle weight restrictions.

Notice: The payload your vehicle can carrywill be reduced when a snow plow is installed.Your vehicle can be damaged if either thefront or rear axle ratings, or the GVW,are exceeded. See your dealer for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

On some vehicles that have certain frontmounted equipment, such as a snowplow, it may be possible to load the frontaxle to the front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enough weight onthe rear axle to have proper brakingperformance. If your brakes can not workproperly, you could have a crash. To helpyour brakes work properly when a snowplow is installed, always follow the snowplow manufacturer or installer’srecommendation for rear ballast to ensurea proper front and rear weight distributionratio, even though the actual front weightmay be less than the front GAWR, and thetotal vehicle weight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR). Maintaininga proper front and rear weight distributionratio is necessary to provide properbraking performance.

236

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 408.

Releasing Air-Operated Parking BrakesIf your vehicle has air brakes, you could have aspecial towing problem. If your vehicle has tobe towed because of a complete loss of airpressure from both systems, the parking brakeswill have automatically engaged. The tow operatorcan release the brakes manually by using thefollowing steps. Then your vehicle can be towedwith all wheels or only the rear wheels on theground.

1. Block the wheels of the vehicle.

2. Remove the release stud and nut from theside of the brake chamber. Some chambershave studs which are visible at all times.

237

3. Remove the rubbercap from the rear ofthe chamber.

4. Put the release stud, nut and flat washer intothe chamber.

5. Turn the stud clockwise a quarter of a turn.

6. Turn the stud nutclockwise severalturns to release thebrakes. Followthe same procedureto release the otherbrake or brakes.

7. At the repair facility, apply air pressure of atleast 70 psi (480 kPa) to the brake chambers,either from an external air supply or thevehicle’s air system.

8. Turn the stud nut counterclockwise severalturns. Remove the stud from the chamber.

9. Replace the stud and washer and tighten thenut into the side of the chamber.

10. Replace the rubber cap.

238

Trailer Connections

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring PackageYour vehicle may be equipped with an eight-wiretrailer towing harness. This harness, with aseven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector,is attached to a bracket on the platform hitch.

The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wireis tied next to the trailer wiring harness for usewith a trailer.

The eight-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Light Blue: CHMSL

• Red: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

Trailer Connections(C7/C8 Models Only)If your vehicle has these trailer connections, theyare located at the rear of the cab for a tractorand at the rear of the chassis when towinga trailer. There will be an air connection and anelectrical connection.

Be sure that the couplings to the trailer are madecorrectly.

Air ConnectionsIf you are not connecting the trailer air lineconnections to another piece of equipment, besure to replace their protective caps.

Electrical ConnectionsThis system is a seven-wire cable that will connectto the trailer, supplying power to the trailer’slighting system. When not in use, it is stored in thetrailer air-hose storage bracket.

239

✍ NOTES

240

Service ........................................................ 244California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 244Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 245Engine Fan Breakage ................................ 246

Fuel ............................................................. 247Gasoline Octane ........................................ 247Gasoline Specifications .............................. 247Additives ................................................... 247Diesel Engine Fuel .................................... 248What Fuel to Use ...................................... 249Very Cold Weather Operation .................... 251Water in Fuel ............................................ 252Running Out of Fuel .................................. 258Fuel Filter Replacement ............................. 259Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 260Filling the Tank ......................................... 260Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 262

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 263Hood Latches ............................................ 263Engine Oil (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) ...... 264Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) .................... 265Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu

Diesel Engine) ........................................ 268Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) .... 272

Engine Oil Life System(DURAMAX® Diesel) ............................... 274

Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) .................... 276

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 277Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 280Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 280Engine Coolant (Gas and DURAMAX®/

Isuzu Engines) ....................................... 282Engine Coolant

(Caterpillar® Diesel Engines) ................... 285Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 285Engine Overheating ................................... 286Cooling System (Gas and DURAMAX®/

Isuzu Engines) ....................................... 288Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 292Power Steering Fluid ................................. 293Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 293Brakes ...................................................... 294Battery ...................................................... 303Jump Starting ............................................ 304

Rear Axle .................................................... 309Rear Axle Shift Motor ................................ 310

Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 311

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

241

Front Axle ................................................... 312Noise Control System ................................. 313

Tampering with Noise Control SystemProhibited .............................................. 313

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 314Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 314Other Service Items .................................... 316

Fuel Filter .................................................. 316Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ...... 316Secondary Fuel Filter and Water

Separator/Heater (Caterpillar® Diesel) ...... 317Automatic Ether Injection System

(Caterpillar® Diesel) ................................ 318Front Wheel Bearings with

Oil-Filled Hubs ........................................ 319Air Conditioning System ............................ 319

Tires ............................................................ 320Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 321Wheel Loading .......................................... 321Dual Tire Operation ................................... 322When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 322Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 323

Tightening the Wheel Nuts ........................ 324Wheel Replacement .................................. 328If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 330

Appearance Care ........................................ 331Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 331Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 333Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 334Care of Safety Belts .................................. 334Weatherstrips ............................................ 334Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 335Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 335Finish Care ............................................... 336Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 337Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 337Tires ......................................................... 338Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 338Finish Damage .......................................... 338Underbody Maintenance ............................ 338Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 339

Vehicle Identification .................................. 340Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 340Service Parts Identification Label ............... 341


242

Electrical System ........................................ 341Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 341Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 341Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 342Fusible Links ............................................. 342Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 342

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 342Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 342Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 345

Capacities and Specifications .................... 348Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 354

Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 356


243

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

244

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 415.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 79.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part D: MaintenanceRecord on page 400.

245

Engine Fan Breakage

{CAUTION:

Changing the Fan Drive Ratio or EngineGoverned Speed:

If you change the fan drive ratio orincrease the governed speed of theengine, you may increase stress and thefan could eventually fail. If the fan breaksapart while it is rotating, pieces can causesevere injury to anyone — such as aservice technician — who is nearby.And, of course, the pieces can severelydamage the vehicle. Do not change thefan drive ratio or increase the governedspeed of the vehicle without getting thenecessary information from your dealer.



Winter Fronts, Grille Covers orObstructions:

Winter Fronts, grille covers or otheradd-on equipment causing obstructions infront or behind the fan should not be usedon this vehicle. If this causes the fan toeventually break apart while it is rotating,the pieces can cause severe injury toanyone nearby, such as a servicetechnician working on the engine, and ofcourse the pieces can severely damagethe vehicle.

246

FuelIf your vehicle has a diesel engine, see DieselEngine Fuel on page 248.

For vehicles with gasoline engines, pleaseread this.

Use of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, you may notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonly referred to asspark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 247 for additional information.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additives thatwill help prevent engine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing your emission control systemto work properly. In most cases, you should nothave to add anything to your fuel. However, somegasolines contain only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer hasadditives that will help correct and prevent mostdeposit-related problems.

247

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Diesel Engine FuelFor the Caterpillar® diesel, see the Caterpillar®

Operation & Maintenance Manual for informationconcerning fuel usage.Notice: Diesel fuel or fuel additives notrecommended in this manual could damageyour fuel system and engine. Your warrantywould not cover this damage. And:• Diesel fuel that has been mixed with engine

oil or automatic transmission fluid coulddamage your engine and emission controls.

• Aftermarket diesel fuel additives are nottested by General Motors. Some additives,particularly those which contain alcohol orwater emulsifiers, may damage your fuelsystem. If you believe that uniquecircumstances call for a fuel additive to beused, consult your dealer for advice.

• If you ever run out of diesel fuel, it can bedifficult to restart your engine. To avoid this,never let your tank get empty.

If gasoline is ever accidentally added to the fueltank, to avoid severe engine damage, do not runthe engine until the fuel tank can be drained.If you run out of fuel, Running Out of Fuel onpage 258 tells you how to restart your engine.

248

What Fuel to UseIn the United States, for best results use No. 2-Ddiesel fuel year-round (above and below freezingconditions) as oil companies blend No. 2-D fuel toaddress climate differences. No. 1-D diesel fuelmay be used in very cold temperatures (when itstays below 0°F or −18°C); however, it willproduce a power and fuel economy loss. Avoid theuse of No. 1-D diesel fuel in warm or hot climates. Itmay result in stalling, poor starting when the engineis hot, and may damage the fuel injection system.

It is important that diesel-powered trucks arerefueled only with ultra low-sulfur fuel. Theemission control system requires the use of dieselfuel with ultra low-sulfur (0.0015% by weight, or15 ppm, maximum) content. Both ultra low-sulfurand higher sulfur diesel fuels are available inthe United States and ultra low-sulfur diesel fuel isavailable in Canada. However, only highersulfur diesel fuel is available in Mexico. Use offuels with higher-sulfur content will affect thefunction of the emission components and maycause reduced performance, excessive smoke,and unpleasant odor.

At a minimum, the diesel fuel you use should meetthe latest version of ASTM specification D 975(Grades No. 2-D or No. 1-D S15 commonly knownas Ultra Low Sulfur diesel) in the United States. Inaddition, the Engine Manufacturers Association(EMA) has identified properties of an improveddiesel fuel for better engine performance anddurability. Diesel fuels corresponding to the EMARecommended Guideline on Premium Diesel Fuel(FQP-1A) could provide better starting, less noise,and better vehicle performance. If there arequestions about the fuel you are using, contactyour fuel supplier.

If your vehicle has the 6.6L engine, it isacceptable to use diesel fuel containing up to5% biodiesel (B5), but the final blended fuelmust meet the same specification, ASTM D 975(Grades No. 2-D or No. 1-D S15 commonly knownas Ultra Low Sulfur diesel), as other fuels used inyour vehicle, and the biodiesel used for makingthis fuel must meet the latest version of ASTMspecification D 6751.Biodiesel is produced fromvegetable oils or animal fat that have beenchemically modified to reduce the possibilityof damage to your fuel system and engine.

249

Higher concentration (i.e., greater than B5)biodiesel-containing fuels or the use of unmodifiedbio-oils blended into diesel fuel at any concentrationis not recommended and could damage your fuelsystem and engine. Such damage would not becovered by your warranty. If there are questionsabout the biodiesel-containing fuels you are using,contact your fuel supplier.

Diesel fuel may foam when you fill your tank. Thiscan cause the automatic pump nozzle to shutoff, even though your tank is not full. If thishappens, just wait for the foaming to stop andthen continue to fill your tank. See Filling the Tankon page 260.

{CAUTION:

Heat coming from the engine may causethe fuel to expand and force the fuel outof your tank. If something ignites the fuel,a fire could start and people could beburned. To help avoid this, fill your fueltank only until the automatic nozzle shutsoff. Do not try to top it off.

What Fuel to Use in CanadaCanadian fuels are blended for seasonal changes.Diesel Type “A” fuel is blended for better coldweather starting (below 0°F or −18°C); however,you may notice some power and fuel economyloss. If Type “A” fuel is used in warmertemperatures, stalling and hard starting mayoccur. Diesel Type “B” fuel is blended fortemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

It is important that diesel-powered trucks arerefueled only with ultra low-sulfur fuel. Theemission control system requires the use of dieselfuel with ultra low-sulfur (0.0015% by weight, or15 ppm, maximum) content. Both ultra low-sulfurand higher sulfur diesel fuels are available inthe United States. Use of fuels with higher-sulfurcontent will affect the function of the emissioncomponents and may cause reduced performance,excessive smoke, and unpleasant odor.

250

At a minimum, the diesel fuel you use should meetthe latest version of specification CAN/CGSB-3.517(Low Sulfur Diesel) in Canada. In addition, theEngine Manufacturers Association (EMA) hasidentified properties of an improved diesel fuel forbetter engine performance and durability (FQP-1A).Diesel fuels corresponding to the EMA descriptioncould provide better starting, less noise, and bettervehicle performance. If there are questions aboutthe fuel you are using, contact your fuel supplier.

If your vehicle has the 6.6L engine, it isacceptable to use diesel fuel containing up to5% biodiesel (B5), but the final blended fuel mustmeet the same specification, CAN/CGSB-3.517(Low Sulfur Diesel) in Canada, as other fuels usedin your vehicle, and the biodiesel used formaking this fuel must meet the latest version ofASTM specification D 6751. Biodiesel is producedfrom vegetable oils or animal fat that havebeen chemically modified to reduce the possibilityof damage to your fuel system and engine.

Higher concentration (i.e., greater than B5)biodiesel-containing fuels or the use of unmodifiedbio-oils blended into diesel fuel at anyconcentration is not recommended and coulddamage your fuel system and engine. Suchdamage would not be covered by your warranty. Ifthere are questions about the biodiesel-containingfuels you are using, contact your fuel supplier.

Very Cold Weather OperationFollow the instructions listed previously under theheading “What Fuel to Use.”

Notice: Never use home heating oil orgasoline in your diesel engine. They can causeengine damage.

In cold weather, your fuel filter may becomeclogged (waxed). To unclog it, move the vehicle toa warm garage area and warm the filter tobetween 32°F and 50°F (0°C to 10°C). You willnot need to replace it. Additional information on thefuel filter follows.

251

Water in Fuel

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel containing water is stillflammable. You could be burned. If youever try to drain water from your fuel,keep sparks, flames and smokingmaterials away from the mixture.

Notice: If there is water in your diesel fueland the weather is warm or humid, fungusand bacteria can grow in the fuel. Theycan damage your fuel system. A diesel fuelbiocide can be used to sterilize your fuelsystem. However, your fuel system may stillneed to be cleaned. Your dealer can advise youof the appropriate solution.

If your fuel tank needs to be purged to removewater, see your dealer or a qualified technician.Improper purging can damage your fuelsystem.

Sometimes, water can be pumped into your fueltank along with your diesel fuel. This can happen ifa service station does not regularly inspect andclean its fuel tanks, or if it gets contaminated fuelfrom its suppliers.

If this happens, thewater-in-fuel light, ifequipped, will comeon in the instrumentpanel. If it does, thewater must be drained.Your dealer can showyou how to do this.

252

If the light comes on, use this chart to determinewhat action to take.

Water In Fuel LightProblem Recommended Action

Light comes onintermittently.

Drain water fromthe fuel filter.

Light stays on attemperatures above

freezing.

Drain the fuel filterimmediately. If no watercan be drained and thelight stays on, see yourdealer for assistance.

Light stays on attemperatures below

freezing.

Drain the fuel filterimmediately. If no watercan be drained, watermay be frozen in the

water drain system, or inthe fuel lines. Move the

vehicle to a warm locationto thaw out, and thendrain the filter system.

Light stays onimmediately after

refueling, and a largeamount of water was

possibly pumped into thefuel tank.

Fuel tank purging isrequired. See your dealer

for assistance.

Notice: If you drive when this warningindicator is on, you can damage your fuelinjection system and your engine. If theindicator comes on right after you refuel, itmeans water was pumped into your fuel tank.Turn off your engine immediately. Then,have the water drained at once.

To drain water, do the following:

1. Stop and park the vehicle in a safe place.Turn off the engine and apply the parkingbrake.

2. Remove the fuel cap.

3. Place a fuel-resistant container under the fuelfilter. The filter drain valve is located on thebottom of the fuel filter.If your vehicle has the 6.6L engine, the fuel filteris located in the engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. If your vehicle haseither the 7.2L or 7.8L engine, the fuel filtersare located in the engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, and on the driver’sside frame rail in front of the fuel tank.

253

4. Open the drainvalve by turningtwo to three turns.When fuel emptiesfrom the valve,all the waterhas been drained.Close the valvehand-tight.

5. Remove the fuel-resistant container andproperly dispose of the contaminated fuel.To find out how to properly dispose ofcontaminated diesel fuel, see Engine Oil(Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) on page264 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) onpage 265 or Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/IsuzuDiesel Engine) on page 268.

6. Install the fuel cap.

7. Start the engine and let it run for a few minutes.If the engine stalls, the fuel system may needto be primed. While draining the water from thefuel filter, air may enter the fuel system. If airhas entered the fuel system the fuel system willneed to be primed.

If the water-in-fuel light comes on again afterdriving a short distance or the engine runs roughor stalls, a large amount of water has probablybeen pumped into the fuel tank. The fueltank should be purged.

254

Fuel PrimingIf your vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine,see the Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation andMaintenance Manual provided with your vehicle.

If your vehicle has a DURAMAX®/Isuzu dieselengine, in order for the fuel system to workproperly, the fuel lines must be full of fuel andcontain no air. If air gets into the fuel lines, it willbe necessary to prime the fuel lines to eliminate airbefore operating the vehicle.

Air can get into the fuel lines if any of the followinghappen:

• The vehicle runs out of fuel.

• The fuel filter is removed for servicing orreplacement.

• The fuel lines are removed or disconnectedfor servicing.

• The fuel filter water drain valve is openedwhile the engine is running.

If one or more of the above occurred, it is verylikely that air has entered your fuel system and thatyou will need to prime the fuel system beforeoperating the vehicle.

Air in the fuel lines will not harm the engine or thevehicle. However, the engine may not be ableto start until the fuel system is primed and the airis removed.

Priming the 6.6L DURAMAX® DieselEngineIf your vehicle is equipped with the 6.6LDURAMAX® diesel engine, it has a priming pumpwhich is part of the engine mounted fuel filter.The vent valve and the fuel filter primer pump arelocated on top of the fuel filter housing. The primingpump is hand operated and is designed to bring fuelto the engine to eliminate any air that may be in thefuel lines.

255

To prime the 6.6L DURAMAX® diesel engine, dothe following:

1. Make sure there is fuel in the tank.

2. Make sure the fuel filter had been installedand properly tightened.

3. Make sure the fuel lines are properlyconnected and the fuel filter is cool enoughto touch.

4. Remove any dirt from the fuel filter head andvent valve by wiping with a cloth.

5. Open the fuel filtervent valve by turningthe screwcounterclockwiseseveral full turns.

6. Repeatedly pushdown on the fuelfilter primerpump with the palmof your hand. Letthe pump returnupward betweenpushes.

7. Operate the priming pump until a smallamount of fuel seeps from the vent valve.When you see the fuel, the filter is now full offuel and the system should be primed.

8. Close the vent valve.

9. Clean any fuel which accumulated on thefuel filter.

10. Start the engine and let it idle for afew minutes.

11. Check the filter for leaks.

256

Priming the 7.8L Isuzu 6H Diesel EngineIf your vehicle is equipped with the7.8L Isuzu 6H diesel engine, use thefollowing procedure to prime the engine:

1. Make sure there is fuel in the fuel tank.

2. Make sure the specified fuel filter is properlyinstalled.

3. Make sure the fuel lines are securelyconnected.

4. Make sure the fuel filter is cool to the touch.

5. Use a clean cloth to remove dirt and oilfrom the fuel filter head and breather valve.

6. Use the palm of your hand to repeatedly pressand release the plunger (1) at the top of thefuel filter priming pump. Continue untilthe plunger resistance becomes firm. Thismay take from 20 to 100 times, dependingupon fuel tank location.

7. Turn the fuel filter breather valve screw (2)counterclockwise several turns to open thebreather valve.

8. Use the palm of your hand to repeatedlypress and release the plunger (1) at thetop of the fuel filter priming pump until fuelbegins to seep from the breather valve.

9. Tighten the fuel filter breather screw (2) to thespecified torque, 4.9 Y (43 in. lbs).

10. Use the palm of your hand to press andrelease the plunger (1) at the top of thefuel filter priming pump about 20 more times.This sends fuel to the engine.

11. Use a clean cloth to remove any fuel from thefuel filter and surrounding area.

257

12. Start the engine and allow it to idle for afew minutes.

13. Check the fuel filter for leakage.

Running Out of FuelIf the diesel engine stalls and you think that youhave run out of fuel, do this to restart your engine:

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel is flammable. It could start afire if it gets on hot engine parts. Youcould be burned. Do not let too much fuelflow from the air bleed valve, and wipe upany spilled fuel with a cloth.

1. If you are parked on a level surface, add atleast 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of fuel. However, ifyou are parked on a slope, you may needto add up to 5 gallons (18.9 liters) of fuel.

2. Follow the fuel priming procedure earlier inthis section to prime the fuel filter.

3. Close the air bleed valve.

4. Turn the ignition key to START for 10 to15 seconds at a time until your engine starts.If the engine tries to run, but does not runsmoothly, increase the rpm a little using theaccelerator pedal. This will help force airthrough the system.

Your check engine light may come on if thevehicle has run out of fuel. This light may stay onfor a few drive cycles after the condition iscorrected, but will eventually clear itself.

258

Fuel Filter ReplacementIf you want to change the diesel engine fuel filteryourself, here is how to do it:

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel is flammable. It could start afire if something ignites it, and you couldbe burned. Do not let it get on hot engineparts, and keep matches or other ignitionsources away.

First, drain any water from the filter by followingthe water draining procedure earlier in this section.

Your vehicle’s engine should be off until the endof this procedure.

If your vehicle has the 6.6L engine, the fuel filter islocated in the engine compartment on the driver’sside of the vehicle. If your vehicle has either the7.2L or 7.8L engine, the fuel filters are located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle, and on the driver’s side frame rail in front ofthe fuel tank.

1. Apply the parking brake.2. Unplug the water

sensor wireconnected to the fuelfilter and unscrewthe filter element.

3. Remove the filter element. If there is any dirton the filter sealing surface, clean it off.Remove and reuse the water sensor floatswitch located on the bottom of the fuel filter.

259

4. Install the new filter element.

5. Reinstall and tighten the filter container andreconnect the water sensor wire to the filter.

6. Use the fuel filter priming procedure earlier inthis section to prime the fuel filter.

7. Tighten the air bleed valve by turning itclockwise until hand-tight.

8. Start your engine and let it idle forfive minutes. Check your fuel filter and airbleed valve for leaks.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

Fuel caps for allgasoline applications,and all diesel between

frame rail fuel tankapplications

Fuel caps for all sidemounted diesel

applications

260

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burnsviolently, and that can cause very badinjuries. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel.

The fuel cap can be on either or both sides ofyour vehicle depending on option content.

To take off the cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.

{CAUTION:

If you get fuel on yourself and thensomething ignites it, you could be badlyburned. Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. This spray



can happen if your tank is nearly full, andis more likely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

When you put the cap back on, turn it clockwiseuntil it is tight.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 172.

If you have dual tanks, fill the driver’s side tank, orforward tank, first. The fuel gage will give betterreadings this way. Your gage will show thetotal fuel left in both tanks.

261

If your vehicle is a C4/C5 model and you havedual tanks, the engine must be off when refuelingor the fuel transfer system may becomeinoperable.

If you have a single tank with dual fillers, wherethere is a filler on each side of the vehicle, do notattempt to fill the tank through both fillers at thesame time. Also, do not fill the tank with both capsremoved, as this may result in over-filling thetank and fuel spillage.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

262

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Latches

To tilt the hood forward, pull back and up on eachof the hood latches, located above the wheelwells on both sides of the vehicle.

263

Then take the hand hold and pull the hoodforward.

When you tilt the hood far enough, the cables willsupport it. When you close the hood, makesure both latches are secured.

Engine Oil(Caterpillar® Diesel Engine)See your Caterpillar® Operation & MaintenanceManual for information on oil quality and viscositiesas well as the temperature range chart.

264

Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)

If the low oil lightappears on theinstrument cluster, itmeans you need tocheck the engine oillevel right away. Formore information, seeLow Oil Level Light onpage 174.

You should check the engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstickis located in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

265

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 348.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

The engine oil fill cap islocated near the engineoil dipstick in theengine compartment, onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

266

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

267

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the API service symbol are all you willneed for good performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/IsuzuDiesel Engine)

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil levelevery time you get fuel.

The engine oil dipstickis located in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

In order to get an accurate reading, the engineshould be at normal operating temperature, so thatthe oil is warm, and the vehicle must be on levelground.

1. If the engine is at normal operatingtemperature and the oil is warm, turn off theengine and allow at least five minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not dothis, the oil dipstick might not show the actuallevel.If the engine has not been run long enough tobring it up to normal operating temperature andthe oil is cool, turn off the engine and allow30 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oilpan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

268

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with apaper towel or a cloth, then push it back inall the way.

3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tipdown, and check the oil level.

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick for the 6.6L V8 DURAMAX® engine,you will need to add at least two quarts/liters of oil.If the oil is below the lower hole at the tip of thedipstick for the Isuzu 6H engine, you will need toadd at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must usethe right kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 348.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area for the 6.6L V8 (LLY) engineor above the upper hole that shows the properoperating range for the 7.8L L6 (LG4) engine,the engine could be damaged.

6.6L V8 DURAMAX® Engine

Isuzu 6H Engine

269

Add oil at the engine oilfill cap in the enginecompartment. Install andfully tighten the fill capwhen you are through.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for these two things:

• CJ-4 or CI-4

Oils designated as API CJ-4 or CI-4 arerecommended for your vehicle. The CJ-4 orCI-4 designations may appear eitheralone, together, or in combination with otherAPI designations, such as API CJ-4/SM.These letters show American PetroleumInstitute (API) levels of quality.

Notice: Use only engine oils that have one ofthese designations, CJ-4 or CI-4, for thediesel engine. Failure to use the recommendedoils can result in engine damage not coveredby your warranty.

270

• SAE 15W-40

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 15W-40is best for your vehicle. However, you canuse SAE 10W-30 at temperatures above0°F (−18°C). When it is very cold, below0°F (−18°C), you should use SAE 5W-40to improve cold starting. 5W-40 is notrecommended for use at high temperatures,above 100°F (38°C).These numbers on the oil container showits viscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40 orSAE 20W-50.

This doughnut-shapedlogo (symbol) is used onmost oil containers tohelp you select thecorrect oil. It means thatthe oil has been certifiedby the AmericanPetroleum Institute.

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that display this logo.

271

GM Goodwrench® oil of the recommendedviscosity grades meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the API service symbol are all you willneed for good performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (VehiclesWithout the Engine Oil Life System)If you have the 6.6L V8 DURAMAX® Engine:Change engine oil and filter every 15,000 miles(24 000 km), or every 12 months, or every750 hours of engine operation, whichever occursfirst. If you have the Isuzu 6H Engine: Changeengine oil and filter every 12,000 miles(20 000 km), or every 12 months, or every600 hours of engine operation, whichever occursfirst. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 363.

Engine Oil Life System(Gasoline Engine)

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A change engine oil light willcome on. See Change Engine Oil Light onpage 174. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year.

272

However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you changeyour oil prior to a change engine oil light beingturned on, reset the system.

To reset the change engine oil light, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalslowly three times within 10 seconds.If the change engine oil light flashes forfive seconds, the system is resetting.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the change engine oil light comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure.

273

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station or a local recyclingcenter for help.

Engine Oil Life System(DURAMAX® Diesel)

When to Change Engine OilIf your vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, ithas a computer system that lets you know when tochange the engine oil and filter. This is basedon injection timing, engine load and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil light will come on.See Change Engine Oil Light on page 174.Change your oil as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km) or 30 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first. It is possible that,if you are driving under the best conditions, the oillife system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engineoil and filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset.

274

Your dealer has GM-trained service people who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 15,000 miles (24 000 km), or150 hours of engine operation, whichever occursfirst, since your last oil change. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed.


To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do thefollowing:


2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalslowly three times within 10 seconds.If the change engine oil light flashes forfive seconds, the system is resetting.


If the change engine oil light comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the Engine Oil LifeSystem has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

275

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing of yourused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar® Diesel Engine)


To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do thefollowing:


2. Fully apply and hold the brake pedal whileyou fully press and release the acceleratorpedal, pausing slightly at each press and eachrelease, three times within five seconds.


If the change engine oil light comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the Engine Oil LifeSystem has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

276

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine aircleaner/filter is locatedin the center of theengine compartment.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

If your vehicle has anair cleaner/filter changeindicator, inspect theindicator at everyoil change and replacethe filter when theindicator tells you to.

For vehicles without a change indicator, inspectthe air cleaner/filter at every oil change andreplace the filter at the first oil change after25,000 miles (40 000 km).

277

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterLocate the filter change indicator. When thechange indicator turns black or is in the red/orangechange area, replace the filter and reset theindicator.

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove thefilter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filterto release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

278

Hood Inlet SealIf your vehicle is being used in heavy snowconditions or for snow plowing, there is apossibility of snow and ice build up in the inlet tothe air cleaner, blocking airflow to the engineand negatively impacting engine performance.

To prevent the blocking of air, remove thehood inlet seal, by doing the following:

1. Loosen the clamp that holds the seal to theair cleaner.

2. Slide Seal off.

3. Store the seal in the inlet, located on theunderside of the hood

4. Store the clamp on the coolant surge tank.Pull the overflow tube out of the whiteplastic retainer, slip the clamp over andreinstall the hose.

The seal will need to be replaced on to the aircleaner for normal driving, especially in thewarmer months.

279

Automatic Transmission FluidWhen to CheckA good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is checked.See your Allison Automatic TransmissionOperator’s Manual to find out when to changeyour transmission fluid and filters.

How to Check and What to UseThe Allison Automatic Transmission Operator’sManual that came with the vehicle shows how tocheck the automatic transmission fluid andwhat fluid to use.

Automatic Transmission External FilterYour automatic transmission filter requiresperiodic replacement.

Consult the Allison Automatic TransmissionOperator’s Manual that came with the vehicle forproper change intervals.

Manual Transmission FluidWhen to CheckA good time to have it checked is when theengine oil is checked. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to find out when to check and changeyour manual transmission fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 363.

280

How to Check and What to UseCheck the fluid level only when your engine is off,the vehicle is parked on a level place, and thetransmission is cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transmission case.

To check the transmission fluid level, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check to be sure that the lubricant level is upto the bottom of the fill opening. On heavyduty transmissions, an inch of oil level equalsabout one gallon of fluid.

3. If the fluid level is good, reinstall the plug andbe sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level islow, add more fluid as described in thenext steps. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of fluid touse. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 397.

How to Add FluidTo add transmission fluid, do the following:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to bring the fluid level up tothe bottom of the fill opening. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine the properfluid to use. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 397.

3. Reinstall the filler plug. Be sure the plug isfully seated.

281

Engine Coolant (Gas andDURAMAX®/Isuzu Engines)The cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 286.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® may cause premature engine,heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant may require changingsooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

282

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeePart C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 397 for more information.

283

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be parked on a level surface.When your engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the FULL COLD mark or higher.

If the low coolantwarning light comeson in the instrumentpanel cluster and stayson, it means you arelow on engine coolant.

See Low Coolant Warning Light on page 171 forfurther information.

284

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Engine Coolant (Caterpillar® DieselEngines)If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine,see the Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation& Maintenance Manual provided with your vehicleto find out what to add, as well as when andhow to service your cooling system.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapThe coolant surge tank pressure cap is located inthe engine compartment, on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

Notice: Your vehicle’s surge tank pressurecap is designed for use with medium-dutycooling systems only. If the surge tankpressure cap is not tightly installed, coolantloss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

285

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gage,as well as a low coolant warning light, on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 171 and Low CoolantWarning Light on page 171 for more information.

Your vehicle also has a check gages warning lighton the instrument panel. See Check GagesWarning Light on page 179 for more information.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

286

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolantlight, can indicate a serious problem. SeeLow Coolant Warning Light on page 171 formore information.

If you get an engine overheat warning with nolow coolant light, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. If climbing a hill, downshift to raise engine andfan speeds.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is abouttwice as fast as normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while you are parked. If you still havethe warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

287

Cooling System (Gas andDURAMAX®/Isuzu Engines)When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Engine FanB. Coolant Surge Tank

If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine,see the Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation andMaintenance Manual provided with your vehicle.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level shouldbe at the FULL COLDmark or higher. If it isnot, you may have a leakat the pressure cap orin the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator,water pump, orsomewhere else inthe cooling system.

288

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engineagain. The engine cooling fan speed shouldincrease when idle speed is doubled by pushingthe accelerator pedal down. If it does not,your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the FULLCOLD mark or higher, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant (Gas and DURAMAX®/Isuzu Engines) onpage 282 or Engine Coolant (Caterpillar® DieselEngines) on page 285 for more information.

289

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

290

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if the engineparts are hot enough. Do not spill coolanton a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure cap whenthe cooling system,including the coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark.

291

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the level reachesslightly above the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In mosteveryday driving conditions, the clutch is not fullyengaged. This improves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing and/or high outside temperatures, the fanspeed increases when the clutch engages. So youmay hear an increase in fan noise. This is normaland should not be mistaken as the transmissionslipping or making extra shifts. It is merely thecooling system functioning properly. The fan willslow down when additional cooling is not requiredand the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you startthe engine. It will go away as the fan clutchdisengages.

292

Power Steering FluidSee Scheduled Maintenance on page 363 todetermine when to check your power steering fluid.

How To Check Power Steering FluidCheck your power steering fluid only whenthe engine is warm. If the engine is not warm,you probably will not get an accurate reading.

If the fluid level is between the MIN (Minimum) andMAX (Maximum) marks, you have enough. If youneed fluid, add only enough of the proper fluid tobring it in between the MIN and MAX marks.

If your power steering fluid level is low, this cancause the brake or service brakes soon warninglights to come on. In addition, the steering effort andemergency brake distance could increase.

If either light remains on after you have addedpower steering fluid to the proper level, thenshut off the engine for 10 seconds. This shouldreset the brake warning lights. If one or both lightsstay on, see “Hydraulic Brake System WarningLights” under Brake System Warning Lighton page 168 for more information.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 397.

Notice: When adding power steering fluid ormaking a complete fluid change, alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protectionagainst freezing.

293

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full.

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

If your vehicle hashydraulic brakes, thereis a brake mastercylinder in the enginecompartment on thedriver side of thevehicle. Refer to theMaintenance Scheduleto determine when tocheck the brake fluid.

294

{CAUTION:

Do not add brake fluid before you checkthe level. If you do, you could get toomuch brake fluid. Brake fluid could spillon the hot engine and it can catch fire.You could be burned and your vehiclecould be damaged. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Checking Brake FluidApply the brake pedal several times with theignition off. The brake fluid reservoir is inthe engine compartment on the driver side of thevehicle. Clean one of the reservoir caps andthe area around the cap, and remove it.

The fluid level should beeven with the bottomring of the filler opening.If it is low, add enoughfluid to fill the reservoir tothe proper level.

295

What to AddUse the proper fluid listed in the MaintenanceSchedule. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap/coverand the area around the cap/cover beforeremoving it. This will help keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in the brake system can damage brakesystem parts so badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid, and do not use DOT-5silicone brake fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 335.

296

Four-Wheel Disc Brakes(Hydraulic Only)Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Four-Wheel and Six-Wheel DrumBrakes (Air Only)The brake drums should be removed and inspectedeach time the tires are removed for rotation orchanging. When you have the front brakesreplaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign thatbrake service is needed.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, the brakesadjust for wear.

Brake Adjustment on Air BrakedVehiclesYour vehicle has automatic slack adjusters.Every time you make a brake stop, the brakesautomatically adjust for wear. Slack adjustersshould never be manually adjusted to correctexcessive brake chamber pushrod stroke.Excessive brake chamber pushrod stroke meansthat the brake system needs to be serviced bya qualified service technician.

Notice: Do not manually adjust automatic slackadjusters. Manual adjustment of the automaticslack adjusters can result in a degradation ofthe slack adjuster performance over time.If the brake chamber pushrod stroke is out ofadjustment, the brake system needs to beserviced by a qualified service technician.

297

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

Air Brake SystemsIf your vehicle has air brakes, it is important toget rid of moisture in the system. Moisturewill damage the system if it is not removed daily.

There are two ways to do this. One is automaticthrough the air brake vehicle’s air dryer with intregalautomatic moisture ejector that purges air fromthe system through a self-contained reservoir.The other way to drain moisture from the air brakesystem is to manually activate drain valves at eachreservoir. Drain the air reservoirs occasionally to besure the air dryer is working properly.

Drain the air brakes at full system pressure. To besure you are at full pressure, check the air pressuregage. It should read at least 100 psi (692 kPa).

Air DryerIf your vehicle has air brakes, it has an air dryermounted on the passenger side frame rail. Thiscollects and removes dirt, moisture, or other foreignmatter from the air prior to entering the brakesystem. The dryer also acts as a moisture ejector.It automatically ejects the moisture when thecompressor cycles. The purge tank has a manualdrain valve that must be drained every day. See“Air Brake Systems” for the manual drain procedure.

The dryer has a filter that you need to change atintervals. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 363for more about servicing this filter.

298

Electric Air CompressorYour vehicle may have an electric air compressor.This compressor is used to run options thatrequire pressurized air, such as an air horn, airseat, 7.8L engine exhaust restrictor, or 7.8L engineexhaust brake.

The air compressor is used when vehicles do nothave an air brake system.

The air supply forthis system must bemaintained by releasingthe drain valve to ejectany moisture that mayhave built up in thesystem.

It is recommended that this system be drained ona weekly basis.

Clutch Pedal Free TravelIf you have a V8 engine and a manual transmission,the clutch will need adjustment when pedal freetravel gets down to about 1/4 inch (6 mm), asmeasured at the clutch pedal pad. You shouldhave 1 1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 51 mm) of clutchpedal free travel.

If the clutch ever needs service, be sure to useonly GM clutch replacement parts.

Chassis LubricationYour Maintenance Schedule provides all ofthe required chassis lubrication intervals andidentifies proper lubricants to use. Be sure tosee the Maintenance Schedule before performingany chassis lubrication service. To determinelocation of chassis lubrication items, use thefollowing charts.

299

Single Axle Models

Item Number Item Remarks1 Brake Camshaft** One fitting each (apply sparingly).2 Steering Column Slip Joint* One fitting.3 Steering Drag Link Ends One fitting each end.

300

Item Number Item Remarks4 Pivot Points and Hinges Apply chassis lubricant.5 Pivot Points and Hinges Apply chassis lubricant.6 Slack Adjuster** One fitting.

7 Brake Cam Roller Pins at interfaceof pin and shoe** Apply engine oil.

8 Front Steering KnucklesOne fitting each side, lower bushing.

(Hand-operated grease gun only.)Hand-pack upper bearing.

9 Front Wheel Bearings Hand-pack or lubricate.10 Steering Tie Rod Ends One fitting each end.11 Spring Slip Pads* (Multi-Leaf Only) Apply chassis lubricant.12 Clutch Release Bearing* Cup or fitting.13 Battery Terminal (except “ST” type) Keep coated with petroleum jelly.14 Transmission Fill to level of filler plug.

15 Propshaft U-Joints Lubricate with GM Part No. 1051344Wheel Bearing Lubricant.

16 Parking Brake Clevis Pin$ Apply chassis lubricant.17 Parking Brake Lever Pivot*, $ Apply chassis lubricant.

18 Clutch Release Cross Shaft,Master Cylinder$

Apply chassis lubricant,fill to 1/4 inch (6 mm) below opening.

19 Release Bearing, Clutch Cross Shaft Two fittings, apply chassis lubricant.20 Clutch Release Fork Two fittings.

* Applies to some vehicles.** Applies to air brakes only.$ Applies to hydraulic brakes only.

301

Tandem Axle Models ItemNumber Item Remarks

1 Brake Camshafts One fitting each.

2 Propshaft U-Joint

One fittingeach joint.

Lubricate with GMPart No. 1051344,

Wheel BearingLubricant

3 Rear Axles Fill to level offiller plug.

4 Brake ShoeRoller Pins

Apply engine oilat pin to shoe

joint only.

5 Rear Spring Pin One fittingeach side.

302

BatteryYour vehicle has one or more maintenance freebatteries. When it is time for a new battery, be sureit has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend anACDelco® replacement battery.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down. (If your vehiclehas more than one battery, be sure to remove thenegative (−) battery cable from each battery.)

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 304 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

When you are ready to use the vehicle again,refer to the engine starting procedure in the Index.

303

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has rundown, you may want to use another vehicle andsome jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery (or batteries) with a negativeground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

If you have a diesel engine vehicle withtwo batteries (or more), you should knowbefore you begin that, especially in coldweather, you may not be able to get enoughpower from a single battery in anothervehicle to start your diesel engine.If your vehicle has more than one battery,use the one closest to the starter — this willreduce electrical resistance.

304

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysturn off your radio and other accessories whenjump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or accessory power outlets.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries, and it could save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and the negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.

Open the hood on yourvehicle and find theremote positive (+)terminal, located under ared plastic cover on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle. Squeeze the tabto open the cover andaccess the remotepositive (+) terminal.

305

You will not see the battery (or batteries) ofyour vehicle under the hood. They are locatedin a frame mounted battery box, which islocated on either the driver’s or the passenger’sside of the vehicle. You will not need to accessyour battery (or batteries) for jump starting. Theremote positive (+) terminal is for that purpose.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.Be sure the batteries have enough water.You do not need to add water to theACDelco® battery (or batteries) installedin your new vehicle.



But if a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

306

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cableto the positive (+)terminal of the deadbattery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect itto the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to theremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

307

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while. Use the highidle option if your vehicle is equipped with it.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

308

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal coverto its original position.

Rear AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant and when tochange it. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 363.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through deepwater that is higher than the front or rearaxle, water may enter the axle housing andcause the axle lubricant to break down.This could damage the gears inside. Avoiddriving your vehicle through deep water.

You should avoid driving your vehicle throughdeep puddles or standing water. If you must drivethrough water that is higher than the front orrear axle, see your dealer immediately afterwardto have the condition of the axle lubricant checked.

309

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 397.

Rear Axle Shift MotorWhen to Check and Change FluidIf you have an optional air-shift two-speed,controlled traction, or locking differential type rearaxle, a good time to check the fluid level in the axleshift motor is when the rear axle lubricant ischecked.

How to Check FluidRemove the plug on the front plate of the axle shiftmotor, add enough fluid to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole, then replace the plug.

What to UseRefer to your Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 397.

310

Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case

When to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check transfer casefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.


A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole,located on the transfer case, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to change the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 363.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 397.

311

Front AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through deepwater that is higher than the front or rearaxle, water may enter the axle housing andcause the axle lubricant to break down.This could damage the gears inside. Avoiddriving your vehicle through deep water.



To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you may need to add some lubricant.Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use seePart C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 397.

312

Noise Control System

Tampering with Noise ControlSystem ProhibitedThe following information relates to compliancewith federal noise emission standards for vehicleswith a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ofmore than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information on maintainingthe noise control system to minimize degradationof the noise emission control system duringthe life of your vehicle. The noise control systemwarranty is given in your warranty booklet.

These standards apply only to vehicles sold in theUnited States.

Federal law prohibits the following acts or thecausing thereof:

1. The removal or rendering inoperative byany person, other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair or replacement, of anydevice or element of design incorporated intoany new vehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol, prior to its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after such device orelement of design has been removed orrendered inoperative by any person.

313

Among those acts presumed to constitutetampering are the acts listed below.

Insulation:• Removal of the noise shields or any

underhood insulation.

Engine:• Removal or rendering engine speed governor,

if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as toallow engine speed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,

or rendering clutch inoperative.

• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehiclehas one.

Air Intake:• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.

• Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.

• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaustpipe clamps.

Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replaced byyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected atleast twice a year for wear or cracking. See “WiperBlade Check” under At Least Twice a Year onpage 392 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways.

314

Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiperassembly toward the driver’s side of thevehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversingSteps 1 and 2.

315

Other Service ItemsFuel FilterFuel Filter/Pressure Regulator(Gasoline Engines)The steel fuel filter/pressure regulator is locatednear the engine compartment on the driver’sside frame rail. If your vehicle has a rear steel fueltank, the fuel filter/pressure regulator is locatednear the rear fuel tank, on the driver’s side framerail. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 363for recommended service intervals.

If your vehicle is equipped with the optional Davcospin-on type filter, it is located on the driver’s sideframe rail.

Fuel Filter (Diesel Engines)If you have a diesel engine, your fuel filter islocated in the engine compartment on the driver’sside of the vehicle, or along the driver’s sideframe rail. See “Fuel Filter Replacement” earlier inthis section for further information.

Also see Scheduled Maintenance on page 363 forrecommended service intervals.

Primary Fuel Filter and WaterSeparator

If you have a dieselengine, you may havethis spin-on filter. Itis located on the driver’sside frame rail.

It has a clear plastic drain bowl at the bottom.Check the drain bowl occasionally for any water orparticles.

To drain the bowl, do the following:

1. Shut off the engine.

2. Partially open the drain valve at the bottom ofthe filter.

316

See Engine Oil (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) onpage 264 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)on page 265 or Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/IsuzuDiesel Engine) on page 268 for proper disposalprocedures.

Secondary Fuel Filter and WaterSeparator/Heater(Caterpillar® Diesel)

If you have a Caterpillar®

diesel engine, you mayalso have this spin-onfilter and fuel separator/heater. It will bemounted in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

It has a metal drain bowl at the bottom.Occasionally, check the bowl for any water orparticles.

To check or drain the bowl, do the following:

• Shut off the engine.

• Push up on the spring loaded drain valve untilclear fuel is flowing from the valve.

The particles or water will drain out first. SeeEngine Oil (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine) on page 264or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 265 orEngine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Engine) onpage 268 for proper disposal procedures.

317

Automatic Ether Injection System(Caterpillar® Diesel)

If you have a Caterpillar®

diesel engine, you mayhave this feature.The ether cylinder islocated in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

To change an empty ether cylinder, followthese steps.

1. Loosen the screw head on thecylinder-to-bracket clamp.

2. Spread the clamp apart.

3. Clean any dirt from the neck of the cylinderand the top of the valve before you take outthe cylinder.

4. Check the inside of the valve for any foreignmatter. Clean the valve as necessary.

5. Cover the valve to protect it from dirt and takeout the cylinder.

6. Install a new gasket whenever you take outthe cylinder. Use only one gasket and spreada light film of clean oil on it before installation.

7. Put in the new cylinder. Turn it clockwise untilit just starts to contact the gasket.

8. Tighten the cylinder another half turn(180 degrees). Don’t over-tighten.

9. Retighten the cylinder clamp.

318

Front Wheel Bearings withOil-Filled HubsNotice: If you drive your vehicle through deepwater that is higher than the front or rearaxle, water may enter the axle housing andcause the axle lubricant to break down.This could damage the gears inside. Avoiddriving your vehicle through deep water.


If your vehicle hasoil-filled hubs,occasionally check tosee if they have enoughoil. You can tell if there isoil there by using thecircular gage on thesight glass.

If there isn’t, clean the rubber fill plug in the centerof the glass, and then remove it. Be careful notto allow any dirt or water to get into the oil.Add enough of the recommended oil to bring it upto the level mark that you’ll see on the glass.

Refer to your Maintenance Schedule for the properoil to use.

When you fill the hub, check the glass again afterdriving a short distance. It takes a while for theoil to flow through the system, and you mayfind that you have to add a little more to fill it tothe proper level. Be sure not to overfill the hub.

Air Conditioning SystemEvery now and then, have your dealership checkyour air conditioning system to be sure it hasnot lost any cooling ability. If you think the systemis not working properly, have your GM dealercheck it out as soon as possible.

319

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 233.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 321.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have been damaged,replace them.

320

Inflation - Tire PressureThe Certification or Tire Information label shows thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire ifyour vehicle has one.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when they areunderinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Wheel LoadingWheels are stamped with a maximum load andcold inflation rating. Be sure you do not exceedthese limits. If you ever think you need to exceedthese limits, first contact the rim and wheelmaker to get their advice.

321

Dual Tire OperationWhen the vehicle is new, check the wheel nuttightness on all wheels with a torque wrench afteryour first 100 miles (160 km) and then 1,000 miles(1 600 km) after that. Whenever a wheel, wheel boltor wheel nut is removed or serviced, repeat the100 miles (160 km), and then 1,000 mile (1 600 km)wheel nut tightness check.See Tightening the Wheel Nuts on page 324 forwheel nut tightening information and proper torquevalues.

{CAUTION:

If you operate your vehicle with a tirethat is badly underinflated, the tire canoverheat. An overheated tire can lose airsuddenly or catch fire. You or others couldbe injured. Be sure all tires (including thespare, if any) are properly inflated.

See Tires on page 320 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 321 for more information onproper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for New TiresReplace your tires when the tread depth is downto 1/8 of an inch (3.2 mm) for the front tires,or 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm) for a rear tire. Also,you need a new tire if:

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

322

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tiresof different types — like radial andbias-belted tires — the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Be sure to use the same type oftires all around.

When you replace tires, make sure they are thesame size, load range, speed rating andconstruction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) asyour original tires.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the axledifferentials, propshafts and transfer case may bedamaged if tires of different sizes, brands ortread types are installed on the front and rearaxles. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned atthe factory to give you the longest tire life andbest overall performance.

Proper front wheel alignment must be maintainedin order to ensure efficient steering, gooddirectional stability, and prevent abnormal tirewear. If you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle is pulling one way or the other, thealignment may need to be reset. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your wheels may need to be balanced.

323

Tightening the Wheel Nuts

{CAUTION:

Wheel nuts that are not tight can workloose. If all the nuts on a wheel come off,the wheel can come off the vehicle,causing a crash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow the rules in thissection to be sure they are.

This section lets you know how often to check thetightness of the wheel nuts on your vehicle andhow tight they must be.

First, use these pictures to decide what kind ofwheels you have.

Then, refer to the following steps for the wheelsyou have.

Hub-Piloted Type,8-Hole

Hub-Piloted Type,10-Hole

324

Hub-Piloted Wheels, 8-Hole or 10-HoleThe studs and nuts used with these wheels haveright-hand threads.

1. With intermittent pilot pads, position a pad at12 o’clock to center the wheel and reducerun-out.

2. Put the tire and rim assembly on the axle hub.Install the outer rear tire and rim assembly sothat its valve stem is exactly opposite thevalve stem on the inner tire and rim assembly.

3. Put on the wheel nuts.

4. Finger-tighten the nuts.5. Oil the surfaces (B)

between the nuts (C)and washers (A).Do not oil the studsor the threads ofthe nut.

325

6. Tighten the nuts to 400 lb ft (542 Y) if an8-hole stud or 480 lb ft (650 Y) if a10-hole stud, using the following diagrams.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, thewheel nuts might come loose and thewheel could fall off, causing a crash.

8-Hole

10-Hole (Front) 10-Hole (Rear)

326

{CAUTION:

If wheel studs are damaged, they canbreak. If all the studs on a wheel broke,the wheel could come off and cause acrash. If any stud is damaged because ofa loose-running wheel, it could be that allof the studs are damaged. To be sure,replace all studs on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have become larger, thewheel could collapse in operation.Replace any wheel if its stud holes havebecome larger or distorted in any way.Inspect hubs and hub-piloted wheels fordamage. Because of loose runningwheels, piloting pad damage may occurand require replacement of the entire hub,for proper centering of the wheels. Whenreplacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts orwheels, be sure to use GM originalequipment parts.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

327

How Often to CheckWheel tightness is so important you should have atechnician check nut tightness on all wheelswith a torque wrench after your first 100 miles(160 km), and then 1,000 miles (1 600 km) afterthat. Be sure to repeat this service whenever youhave a tire removed or serviced. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 363 for further information.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, replace the wheel. If the wheel leaksair, replace it.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sureto have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

A leaking wheel could fail without warning.A wheel designed for tubeless tires couldbe leaking because it is damaged. Do notuse an inner tube or some other thing to tryto stop the leaking. Get a new wheel of theproper type.

328

{CAUTION:

Without the correct wheel, you may not beable to stop properly, and you could haveother problems like a tire air-out. You couldhave a collision. If you do not go to yourdealer to get a new wheel, be sure you getthe correct one. Each new wheel shouldmatch the original wheel in load-carryingcapacity, inflation pressure capacity,diameter, width, offset and mountingconfiguration.

Using wheels and tires with higher load-carryinglimits than the original wheels and tires does notchange the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) orthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of yourvehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 233 formore information.

Notice: The wrong wheel can cause trouble inbearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance, stoppingdistance and tire clearance to the body andchassis. You could also have other problemslike a tire air-out.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

329

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much morelikely to leak out slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowout,remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop –– well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place and turnon your hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 140.

{CAUTION:

Your vehicle, when new, did not includetire changing equipment or a place tostore a tire in the vehicle. Special toolsand procedures are required if a tireneeds to be serviced. If these tools andprocedures are not used, you or otherscould be injured or killed while trying tochange or service a truck tire.

Your truck, when new, did not include tire changingequipment or a place to store a tire in thevehicle. Few drivers of these vehicles have thenecessary equipment aboard to be able to changea flat tire safely. For example, you would needa truck jack that can lift several thousand poundsand a torque wrench that can generate severalhundred foot-pounds (Y) of twisting force.

330

{CAUTION:

If you try to put air back into a tire thathas run flat, even a tire that was extremelylow on air, the tire can have a suddenair-out. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and have a seriouscrash. Do not refill a flat or very low tirewith air without first having the tire takenoff the wheel and checked for damage.

So if you are stopped somewhere by a flat ordamaged tire or wheel, you should get expert help.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 408.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best ifit is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirtcan damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from your upholstery. It isimportant to keep your upholstery from becomingand remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

331

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Removeany accidental over-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

332

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

333

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers onplastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protect softplastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 397.

334

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 339. Do not usecleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives.

All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and acar washing soap to clean exterior lamps andlenses. Follow instructions under Washing YourVehicle on page 335.

335

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 339.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is all that isusually needed. However, you may use chromepolish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

336

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Clean theblade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked infull-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsThe vehicle may be equipped with eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

337

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system eventhough they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

338

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax- Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches andother light surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

339

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, leatherand carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels andthe certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

340

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in a location determined bythe body manufacturer. It is very helpful if youever need to order parts. On this label, you will findthe following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker in the light switch. An electrical overloadwill cause the lights to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. If this happens, haveyour headlamp wiring checked right away.

341

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker inside the motor and a circuitbreaker or fuse in the fuse block. If the motoroverheats, the wipers will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by an electricalproblem, be sure to get it fixed.

Fusible LinksA fusible link is a short piece of wire severalgauge sizes smaller than the circuit it protects.It will melt in an overload situation, openingthe circuit.

Your starter and other circuits have these fusiblelinks. The size is printed on the insulation. If theinsulation is burned beyond recognition, consultyour dealer for the proper size. Replace a fusiblelink with one of the same size and insulation type.Fusible link insulation is a special purposehigh-temperature material.

Some examples of circuits with fusible links arethe hydraulic brake booster motor feed circuit, thegenerator output circuit, and the intake heaterfeed circuit in vehicles with a diesel engine.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens.This protects the circuit until the current load returnsto normal or the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers, maxi-fuses and fusible links. This greatlyreduces the chance of a fire caused by an electricalproblem. There may be a fuse taped to the wiringharness near the hydraulic brake booster.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThere are two instrument panel fuse blockslocated behind the instrument panel on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.Be sure to replace fuses with fuses of the samerating. Do not use fuses of higher amperagethan those indicated on the fuse block.

342

Fuse Usage

1 Stoplamps

2 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

3 Parking Lamps

4 Powertrain Control Module

Fuse Usage

5 Auxiliary Wiring

6 Heater/Air Conditioning

7 Hazard Warning Flashers

8 Power Post

343

Fuse Usage

9 Courtesy Lamps

10 Warning Lights, Gagesand Indicators

11 Starter

12 Rear Axle/Four-Wheel-Drive

13 Trailer Turn Signals/HazardWarning Flashers

14 Radio/Chime

15 Daytime Running Lamps

16 Airbag System

17 Exterior/Interior Lamps

18 Parking Brake

19 Accessory Power

20 Ignition 4

21 Sidemarker Lamps

22 Turn Signal/Backup Lamps

23 Transmission

24 Hydraulics/Air Brake

Fuse Usage

A Spare

B Spare

Fuse Usage

Blank Not Used

BRK Brake Warning Lamp

RT PRK Passenger’s Side Parking Lamps

Blank Not Used

Blank Not Used

LT PARK Driver’s Side Parking Lamps

RT REARTRN/STOP

Passenger’s Side Rear TurnSignal/Stoplamp

LT REARTRN/STOP

Driver’s Side Rear TurnSignal/Stoplamp

RADIO Radio

Blank Not Used

Blank Not Used

PWR WNDW Power Windows

344

Relay Usage

ECU/PTO* Engine Control Unit/PowerTake-Off *Diesel 7.8 DURAMAX®

BRK LAMP C4/C5 Brake Lamps,C6/C7/C8 Tractor/Trailer Wiring

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

IGN-4 Ignition

CHMSL Center High Mounted Stoplamp

MRK LTS Sidemarker and Clearance Lamps

HTD/MIRR Heated Mirrors

HTR Diesel Heated Fuel

RT TRN TRLR Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn Signal

Blank Not Used

LT TRN TRLR Driver’s Side Trailer Turn Signal

Blank Not Used

Blank Not Used

Blank Not Used

Underhood Fuse BlockWhen a circuit goes out, the problem could be ineither the primary or secondary underhoodfuse blocks. These blocks use blade-type fuses.

Both underhood fuse blocks are located inthe engine compartment, on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

To access the fuse blocks, gently squeeze bothsides of the cover to unlatch the tabs at thetop. Then, unsnap both attachments at the bottomand remove the cover.

Be sure to replace fuses with fuses of the samerating. Do not use fuses of higher amperagethan those indicated on the fuse block.

345

Fuse Usage

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

ENG 1 Engine 1

ENG 3 Engine 3

PCM-B Powertrain Control Module

BLANK Not Used

Fuse Usage

ENG 4 Engine 4

ENG 2 Engine 2

HTD FUEL Heated Fuel

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

02A Emissions

A/C COMP Air Conditioning Compressor

ABS 1 Anti-lock Brake System 1



ENGINE Engine

E/A PUMP Electronic/Automatic Pump

HORN Horn

NOTE 2L18 Fuel, LG4 PowertrainControl Valve, LG5 ElectronicControl Module

NOTE 3L18 Fuel, LG4 PowertrainControl Valve, LG5 ElectronicControl Module

Primary Underhood Fuse Block

346

Fuse Usage

STUD A Spare

STUD B Spare

Relay Usage

NOTE 1 LLY/L18 Fuel Pump Relay,LG4/LG5 Heated Fuel Relay

IGN B Ignition Relay

STARTER Starter Relay

HORN Horn Relay

IGN A Ignition Relay

PTO/ECU* Power Take-Off/Engine Control Unit(*Diesel 7.8L LG4)

REVERSE Reverse Relay

NEUTRALSTART

Neutral Start (LG4 Allison AutomaticTransmission Series 3000/3500)

Fuse UsageIGN 1 Ignition 1IGN 4 Ignition 4IGN 3 Ignition 3

BATT/HAZ Battery/Hazard Warning FlashersHEADLAMP HeadlampsLIGHTING Interior/Exterior Lamps

HVAC Climate Control System

NOTE C4/C5 Electric Brake,C6/C7/C8 Brake Lamps

Secondary UnderhoodFuse Block

347

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 397 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant caution label

located under the hood. See your dealer formore information.

Cooling System – C4/C5 Models

6.6L Automatic Transmission 27.3 qt 25.8 L

8.1L Automatic Transmission 29.8 qt 28.2 L

8.1L Manual Transmission 30.1 qt 28.5 L

Cooling System – C6/C7/C8 Automatic Transmission

7.2L Engine (hp 207 - 230) 31.4 qt 29.7 L

7.2L Engine (hp 250 - 300) 31.2 qt 29.5 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (hp 200 - 215) 33.7 qt 31.9 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (hp 230 - 275) 33.3 qt 31.5 L

8.1L Engine (hp 225 - 295) 32.5 qt 30.8 L

348


English Metric

Cooling System – C6/C7/C8 Manual Transmission

7.2L 207 - 230 hp Engine 29.3 qt 27.7 L

7.2L 207 - 230 hp Engine with A/C and Increased Cooling 33.0 qt 31.2 L

7.2L 250 - 300 hp Engine 32.8 qt 31.0 L

7.2L 250 - 300 hp Engine with A/C and Increased Cooling 33.3 qt 31.5 L

Isuzu 6H 200 - 230 hp Engine 31.6 qt 29.9 L

Isuzu 6H 200 - 230 hp Engine with A/C and IncreasedCooling 35.3 qt 33.4 L

Isuzu 6H 250 - 300 hp Engine 34.9 qt 33.0 L

Isuzu 6H 250 - 300 hp Engine with A/C and IncreasedCooling 35.4 qt 33.5 L

8.1L 225 - 295 hp Engine 33.3 qt 31.5 L

8.1L with A/C and Increased Cooling 34.9 qt 33.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter

6.6L 14.6 qt 13.8 L

7.2L 30.0 qt 28.4 L

349


English Metric

Isuzu 6H1 23.8 qt 22.5 L

8.1L 10.0 qt 9.4 L

Check fill level on the oil indicator after initial fill to make sure it is actually full. Oil level may vary depending onvehicle option content.1Additional oil is required with auxiliary oil filter systems. Make sure to add enough extra oil to fill the auxiliary oilfilter system. For vehicles equipped with the LUBERFINER 750-C, add 14 quarts (13.25 L).

Fuel Capacity – C4/C5 Models

Standard (Mid-Mounted) 25 gal 94.6 L

Optional1 (Dual-Tank) (Mid-Mounted) 40 gal 151.4 L

Optional (Mid-Mounted) 32 gal 121.1 L

Optional (Side-Mounted) 35 gal 132.5 L





One 25-gallon (94.6 L) tank and one 15-gallon (56.8 L) tank

Fuel Capacity – C6/C7/C8 Models

Optional 35 gal 132.4 L

Standard 50 gal 189.2 L

350


English Metric

Optional 50 gal 189.2 L

Optional1 (Dual Tanks) 70 gal 264.8 L

Optional2 (Dual Tanks) 75 gal 283.8 L

Optional3 (Dual Tanks) 100 gal 378.5 L1Two 35-gallon (132.4 L) tanks2One 25-gallon (94.6 L) tank and one 50-gallon (189.2 L) tank3Two 50-gallon (189.2 L) tanks

Front 4WD Axle (G38) 7.0 pt 3.6 L

Rear Axle – Single Speed

80 (GL4) 8.0 pt 3.7 L

19060D (HPM), 19060S (HPK), 21060D (HPN), 21060S(HPP), 22060S (HPG) 31.0 pt 14.7 L

23090S (HPT) 42.5 pt 20.1 L

23105D (HNB), 23105S (HNA) 51.0 pt 24.1 L

26105S (HPA) 51.0 pt 24.1 L

S110 (HD2) and S130 (HD1) 15.0 pt 7.1 L

Rear Axle – Tandem

DS344 (front) (HPI) 34.0 pt 16.1 L

DS344 (rear) (HPI) 31.0 pt 14.7 L

351


English Metric

DS404 (HPE), DS404P (HPJ) (front/rear unit) 32.0 pt 15.1 L

RSH44 (front/ rear unit) (HP3) 29.0 pt 13.7 L

Rear Axle – Two-Speed

19060T (HPL), 22060T (HPH) 38.0 pt 18.0 L

21060T (H15) 38.0 pt 18.0 L

23082T (H25) 44.0 pt 20.8 L

26080T (GJ4) 44.0 pt 20.8 L

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) 4.0 pt 1.9 L

Transmission Fluid, Automatic

3000 RDS and EVS, and 3500 RDS and EVS with PTOProvision 59.0 pt 28.1 L

3000 RDS and EVS, and 3500 RDS and EVS without PTOProvision 52.0 pt 24.6 L

1000 HS, RDS, MH, PTS and EVS, 2200 HS, RDS, MH,PTS and EVS, 2500 HS and RDS, and 2300 HS and RDS 35.0 pt 16.5 L

Add 2 pints (1 L) when changing spin-on or remote filter.See the Allison® Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manual for fluid check and maintenance information.

352


English Metric

Transmission Fluid, Manual

ES052-7, ES066-7 22.0 pt 10.4 L

FS5205A 12.5 pt 5.9 L

FSO8406, FS6305A, FS6305B, FS6406, FS5406A 19.5 pt 9.2 L

FS4205A, FS4205B 11.5 pt 5.4 L

RT6609 12.0 pt 5.7 L

RT8709 26.0 pt 12.3 L

RT8908LL 28.0 pt 13.2 L

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine RPO Type

6.6L V8 DURAMAX® LLY Common Rail Fuel System

7.2L L6 Caterpillar® C7 LG5 Hydraulic/Electronic Unit InjectorFuel System

7.8L Isuzu 6H LG4 Common Rail Fuel System

8.1L V8 VORTEC™ L18 Single Port Fuel Injector FuelSystem

353

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberAir Compressor FilterHaldex compressor (8.1L Engine Only) 88915425 A507CF

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter6.6L; 8.1L (C4/C5 Models) 88937527 A2032C7.2L; 7.8L (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Standard Air Cleaner 88937525 A2031C7.2L; 7.8L (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Heavy Duty Air Cleaner 889375251 A2031C8.1L (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Heavy Duty Air Cleaner 88937525 A2031C8.1L (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Standard Air Cleaner 88937545 A2034C

Engine Oil Filter6.6L 88917036 PF22327.2L — 1R-1807††7.8L 94037791 —8.1L 25324052 PF454

Fuel Filter6.6L 97385488 TP1298A7.2L — 1R-0751††7.8L 94392474 —8.1L (NG6/NK1) 21998364 —8.1L (All others) — S3202†

354

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberPower Steering Fluid Filter 88892858 —Secondary Fuel Filter

6.6L — —7.2L 25014274 TP915D7.2L (KUK) 88983117 TP15197.2L (NWB) 15618921 —7.8L 25014274 TP915D7.8L (KUK) 88983117 TP15198.1L (K28 and standard Uhaul) 25014476 TP1247

Spark Plugs6.6L — —7.2L — —7.8L — —8.1L 12578277 41-983

1Optional air filter (GM Part No. 88937548 AC Delco No. A2035C) for C6/C7/C8 Models. Fits inside standard sizefilter (GM Part No. 88937525 AC Delco No. A2031C) listed previously.†Racor part number.††Caterpillar® part number.See the Allison Transmission® Operator’s Manual in your vehicle for external filter part numbers and information.

355

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Air conditioning compressor (A).

Dual Generators (B).


Air brake compressor (B).8.1L V8 Engine (C4, C5)

8.1L V8 Engine (C6,C7,C8)

356

Dual Generators (A). Air conditioning compressor (A).

6.6L V8 DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine

357


7.2L V6Caterpillar® Diesel

Engine

358

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 360Introduction ............................................... 360Maintenance Requirements ........................ 360Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 360How This Section is Organized ................. 360Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services .... 362Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 362Scheduled Maintenance Supplements ........ 363

Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 363Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 391At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 391At Least Twice a Year .............................. 392At Least Once a Year ............................... 396Part C: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .............................................. 397Part D: Maintenance Record ..................... 400

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

359

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. Any damagecaused by failure to follow scheduled maintenancemay not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofour parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often.Some of these services can be complex, sounless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should let yourGM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.

360

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 245.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 415.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what should be checked and when.It also explains what you can easily do tokeep your vehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part D: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

361

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help keepyour vehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part C. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find limits onyour vehicle’s Certification or Tire Informationlabel. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 233.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 247 for gasoline enginevehicles or What Fuel to Use on page 249 fordiesel engine vehicles.

362

Scheduled MaintenanceSupplementsIf your vehicle has a Caterpillar® dieselengine, your owner’s manual is supplementedby the Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation& Maintenance Manual. If your vehicle has anAllison Transmission®, your owner’s manualis supplemented by an Allison Transmission®

Operator’s Manual. Always refer to thesemanuals for related maintenance services.

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) shouldbe repeated at the same miles (km) afterthose intervals for the life of this vehicle.

Gasoline engine vehicles and some DURAMAX®

diesel and Isuzu 6H diesel engine vehicles have acomputer that lets you know when to change theengine oil. This is not based on mileage, but onengine operation and engine temperature. Whenthe computer has calculated that the oil needschanging, the Engine Oil Life System will indicatethat a change is necessary. See Engine Oil LifeSystem (Gasoline Engine) on page 272 or EngineOil Life System (DURAMAX® Diesel) on page 274or Engine Oil Life System (Caterpillar® DieselEngine) on page 276.

The “Footnotes” at the end of this MaintenanceSchedule further explain maintenance services.

See Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 415.

100 Miles (160 km)❑ Wheel stud nut service. (36)

1,000 Miles (1 600 km)❑ Wheel stud nut service. (36)❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)

363

7,500 Miles (12 000 km)❑ Gasoline Engine Only: Check engine oil life

system. If engine oil and filter are changed,reset system. See “Engine Oil (GasolineEngine)” in the Index. (2) (8)

❑ Check fluid levels (or every 3 months,whichever occurs first). (1) (5)

❑ Chassis lubrication service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (11)

❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle boltsservice. (15)

❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months,

whichever occurs first). (6) (36)❑ Parking brake service (or every 6 months,

whichever occurs first). (21)❑ Air brake service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (32)❑ Air brake automatic slack adjuster service (or

every 500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)❑ Check air brake relay valve operation and check

for leaks (or every month, or every 300 hours,whichever occurs first).

❑ Clean air brake application valve (or every3 months, or every 300 hours, whichever occursfirst). Lubricate linkage.

❑ Air brake chamber service (or every 2 months,whichever occurs first). (34)

12,000 Miles (20 000 km)❑ Isuzu 6H Diesel Without Engine Oil Life System

Only: Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, or every 600 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first). (2)

❑ Isuzu 6H Diesel With Engine Oil LifeSystem Only: Check oil life system (or every12 months, or every 600 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first). If engine oiland filter are changed, reset system. See“Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel)” inthe Index. (2) (7)

364



❑ 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel Without Engine OilLife System Only: Change engine oil andfilter (or every 12 months, or every 750 hoursof engine operation, whichever occurs first). (2)

❑ 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel With Engine OilLife System Only: Check oil life system.If engine oil and filter are changed, resetsystem. See “Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/IsuzuDiesel)” in the Index. (2) (9)



❑ Gasoline Engine: Inspect engine air cleanerfilter. If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicleis driven in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectfilter at every engine oil change. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 277 for moreinformation.

❑ Diesel Engine: Inspect engine air cleaner filterchange indicator. If necessary, replace thefilter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect filter change indicator at every engineoil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 277 for more information.

❑ DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Only: Replace fuelfilter (or every 750 hours of engine operation,whichever occurs first).

❑ Steering system service. (12)❑ Front and rear suspension service. (13)❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle bolts

service. (15)❑ Exhaust system service (or every 6 months,

whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months,


whichever occurs first). (21)❑ Air brake service (or every 6 months,

whichever occurs first). (32)❑ Air brake automatic slack adjuster service (or

every 500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)

365

❑ Check air brake relay valve operation andcheck for leaks (or every month, or every300 hours, whichever occurs first).

❑ Clean air brake application valve (or every3 months, or every 300 hours, whicheveroccurs first). Lubricate linkage.


❑ Thermostatically controlled engine coolingfan service. (3) (19)

❑ Shields and underhood insulationservice. (3) (4) (20)

❑ Gasoline Engine: Air compressor remotemounted air filter dry element pleated paperair strainer service (or every 6 months orevery 1800 hours, whichever occurs first).





❑ Inspect door hinge pins and bushings andreplace as necessary.

❑ Cooling system service. Clean the coolingsystem filter cap with clean water, cleanthe core, pressure test the cap and the systemfor proper pressure capability, and inspectcondition of cooling and heater hosesand clamps. Replace hoses if cracked,swollen, or damaged.





every 500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)

366

❑ Check air brake relay valve operation andcheck for leaks (or every month, or every300 hours, whichever occurs first).



❑ Air brake system valve service (or every3 months, or every 900 hours, whicheveroccurs first). (37)

❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)

❑ Evaporative Control System service, ifequipped, (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). (2) (24) †

❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)



❑ Isuzu 6H Diesel With Engine Oil Life SystemOnly: Check oil life system (or every 12 months,or every 600 hours of engine operation,whichever occurs first). If engine oil and filterare changed, reset system. See “Engine Oil(DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel)” in the Index. (2) (7)

❑ Lubricate U-joints (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first).

367






❑ Gasoline Engine: Inspect engine air cleanerfilter. If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicleis driven in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectfilter at every engine oil change. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 277 formore information.




❑ Replace fuel filter(s) (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (2)



whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and

whenever hubs are removed). (22) (36)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months,

whichever occurs first). (6) (36)

368

❑ Parking brake service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (21)

❑ Air brake service (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first). (32)

❑ Air brake automatic slack adjuster service (orevery 500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)

❑ Check air brake relay valve operation and checkfor leaks (or every month, or every 300 hours,whichever occurs first).



❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first.) (17)







369


















❑ Gasoline Engine: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 277 for more information.

370




❑ Cooling system service. Clean the coolingsystem filler cap with clean water, cleanthe core, pressure test the cap and thesystem for proper pressure capability,and inspect condition of cooling and heaterhoses and clamps. Replace hoses if cracked,swollen, or damaged.


❑ Steering system service. (12)❑ Front and rear suspension service. (13)

❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle boltsservice. (15)

❑ Exhaust system service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)









371




❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)❑ Evaporative Control System service, if

equipped, (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). (2) (24) †





❑ Lubricate U-joints (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).

50,000 Miles (80 000 km)❑ Inspect air compressor discharge port (or every

6 months or every 1,800 hours, whicheveroccurs first.)

372





❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Engine Only: Adjust

valve lash (or every 2,625 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first). (18)

❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (6) (36)

❑ Parking brake service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (21)










❑ Isuzu 6H Diesel Without Engine Oil Life SystemOnly: Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, or every 600 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first). (2)

373


❑ Gasoline Engine Only (Vehicles with GVWgreater than 16,000 lbs): Spark plugservice. (2) (25)


❑ Gasoline Engine: Inspect engine air cleanerfilter. If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicleis driven in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filterat every engine oil change. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 277 for more information.

❑ Diesel Engine: Inspect engine air cleaner filterchange indicator. If necessary, replace the filter.If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect filter change indicator at every engineoil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 277 for more information.







whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and



whichever occurs first). (21)

374






❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (17)













375






❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)❑ Evaporative Control System service, if

equipped, (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). (2) (24) †








376

❑ 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel With Engine Oil LifeSystem Only: Check oil life system. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset system.See “Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel)”in the Index. (2) (9)



❑ Gasoline Engine: Inspect engine air cleanerfilter. If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicleis driven in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectfilter at every engine oil change. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 277 for moreinformation.



❑ Steering system service. (12)

❑ Front and rear suspension service. (13)❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle bolts


whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months,








377

❑ Fuel tank, fuel cap and fuel lines service(or every 72 months, whichever occursfirst). (2) (26) †

❑ Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) systeminspection (if equipped) (or every 72 months,whichever occurs first). (2) (27)
















378







❑ 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel With Engine Oil LifeSystem Only: Check oil life system. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset system.See “Engine Oil (DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel)” inthe Index. (2) (9)


❑ Gasoline Engine: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 277 for more information.




379





whichever occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Inspect door hinge pins and bushings and

replace as necessary.❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and










❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (17)



❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)

380

❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)

❑ Evaporative Control System service, ifequipped, (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). (2) (24) †
















381



100,000 Miles (160 000 km)❑ Diesel Only: Inspect engine drive belt; replace

as necessary.❑ Gasoline Engine Only (Vehicles with GVW

of 16,000 lbs or less): Spark plugservice. (2) (25)

❑ Change power steering fluid (or every36 months, whichever occurs first). (12)

❑ Replace power steering reservoir filter element(or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).

❑ Wheel bearing (oil type) service (and wheneverhubs are removed). (22) (36)

❑ Except four-wheel drive: Front axle service. (31)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Front axle service. (30)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Transfer case

service. (30)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®,

Spicer® axles (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). (30)

❑ Exhaust brake service, if equipped. Check forexcessive spindle free play and smoothoperation. Lubricate ball joint cap.

❑ Inspect air compressor discharge port (or every6 months or every 1,800 hours, whicheveroccurs first).

❑ Manual transmission (ZF 6-speed only) fluidreplacement (or every 48 months, whicheveroccurs first).

❑ Trailer brake hand control valve service (or every12 months, or every 3,600 hours, whicheveroccurs first). (35)

120,000 Miles (192 000 km)❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines

Only: Replace engine drive belts.❑ C400 and C500 Gasoline Engines Only: Engine

drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (17)

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Cooling system service (or every 60 months

since last service, whichever occursfirst). (2) (29)

❑ Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine drive belt;replace as necessary.

382

200,000 Miles (320 000 km)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®,

Spicer® axles (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (30)

❑ Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspectthe air brake trailer supply valve (or every2 years, or every 7,200 hours, whicheveroccurs first).

❑ Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine drive belt;replace as necessary.

250,000 Miles (400 000 km)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Front axle service. (30)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Transfer case

service. (30)❑ Manual transmission (except ZF 6-speed)

fluid replacement (or every 60 months,whichever occurs first).

300,000 Miles (480 000 km)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®,

Spicer® axles (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (30)

❑ Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspectthe air brake air dryer (or every 3 years,or 10,800 hours, whichever occurs first).Replace desiccant.

Footnotes† = The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the California Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle’s useful life. We,however, urge that all recommended maintenanceservices be performed at the indicated intervalsand the maintenance be recorded.

(1) = If your vehicle has an Allison Transmission®,your GM owner manual is supplemented byan Allison Transmission® Operator’s Manual.Always refer to these manuals for relatedmaintenance services.

383

(2) = An Emission Control Service.

(3) = A Noise Emission Control Device.

(4) = Applies to vehicles sold in the United Statesand is recommended for vehicles sold in Canada.

(5) = Check fluid level in brake master cylinder,power steering pump, front and rear axles,transmission, and hydraulic spring parking brakepump (if equipped). A low fluid level in thebrake master cylinder can indicate worn brakelinings and should be checked accordingly.

(6) = Inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect caliper assemblies.Check brake pedal for excessive free play or travel(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first) andhave serviced if needed. Check brakes more oftenif driving habits and conditions result in frequentbraking.

(7) = This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System.This system will show you when to change theengine oil and filter — usually between 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and 12,000 miles (20 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles(5 000 km). Never drive your 7.8L diesel enginevehicle more than 12,000 miles (20 000 km),or 12 months, or 600 engine hours, without anoil and filter change.

Remember to reset the Engine Oil Life Systemwhenever the oil is changed. For more information,see Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine)on page 272 or Engine Oil Life System(DURAMAX® Diesel) on page 274 or EngineOil Life System (Caterpillar® Diesel Engine)on page 276.

384

(8) = This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System.This system will show you when to change theengine oil and filter — usually between 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles(5 000 km). Never drive your gasoline enginevehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 000 km) or12 months without an oil and filter change.


(9) = This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System.This system will show you when to change theengine oil and filter — usually between 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and 15,000 miles (24 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles(5 000 km). Never drive your 6.6L diesel enginevehicle more than 15,000 miles (24 000 km),or 12 months, or 750 engine hours, without anoil and filter change.


(10) = Inspect rear axle air shift motor for fluidleaks. Remove plug to check fluid level. Inspectair lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, etc. Inspect at 1,000 miles (1 600 km)and 22,500 miles (36 000 km) and then every22,500 miles (36 000 km) thereafter.

385

(11) = Chassis Lubrication Service: Lubricate allgrease fittings in front suspension, front axle,and steering linkage. DO NOT lubricate kingpinbushings with air pressure equipment; instead, usea hand grease gun to ensure complete purgeand eliminate sealer cap distortion. Front axle tierod ends, both upper and lower kingpin fittings,and both steering linkage relay rod ends should begreased with the vehicle loaded on the groundand wheels turned straight ahead, NOT withthe vehicle on a hoist. Apply kingpin bushinglubricant to both upper and lower kingpin greasefittings until new lubricant purges from between theupper shim pack and thrust bearing. Lubricatetransmission and shift linkage, hood latches andhood hinges, parking brake lever pivot, clevis pinsand linkage, disc brake caliper rails, clutchlinkage and release bearing (if equipped), bearingpads, propshaft universal joints, brake camshaftbracket, slack adjusters, pedal shaft, clutchcross shaft, clutch pedal springs, and clutch cablebushing at transmission. Lubricate suspension,axle, and steering linkage more often whenoperating under dusty or muddy conditions and inexcessive off-road use. Frequently power-washedvehicles will require more frequent lubrication.

(12) = Check steering system:

• Look for damaged, loose, or missing parts.Inspect the steering linkage relay rod andtie rod ends for looseness or lack of lubricant.Also look for parts showing signs of wearor lack of lubrication. Replace parts asneeded. Also check steering gear mountingbolts, pitman arm nut, gear housing uppercover and side cover attaching bolts, steeringcolumn mounting bolts and cardan jointclamp bolts; tighten if necessary. See theservice manual.

• Inspect power steering hoses, tubes, andfittings for leaks. Hoses and lines must notbe twisted, kinked, or tightly bent. Make sureclips, clamps, supporting tubes, and hosesare in place and properly secured.

• Check steering gear for leakage aroundpitman shaft and housing. If leakage is evident(lubricant oozing out, not just oily film), leakshould be corrected immediately.

386

(13) = Check front and rear suspension. Lookfor damaged, loose, or missing parts or partsshowing signs of wear or lack of lubrication.Replace parts as needed.

(14) = Adjust tire pressures as indicated on theCertification or Tire Information label for optimumtire life. See Tires on page 320 for furtherdetails. Check tires for excessive or abnormalwear or damage. Also check for damaged wheels.Replace wheels and/or tires as needed.

(15) = Check spring-to-axle U-bolts and shacklebolts for proper torque. See the service manual fortorque sequence and specifications. When partsare replaced, the torque must be checked andadjusted more often during the first 6,000 miles(10 000 km). Check torque at 500 miles (800 km)and 2,000 miles (3 000 km) after first use of parts.

(16) = Check complete exhaust system andcab areas near the exhaust system for broken,damaged, missing, or out-of-position parts.Also inspect for open seams, holes, looseconnections, or other conditions which could letexhaust fumes seep into the driver compartment.Needed repairs should be made at once. Tohelp maintain system integrity, replace exhaustpipes whenever a new muffler is put on.

(17) = Check all gasoline engine drive belts forcracks, fraying, and wear. Replace as needed.

(18) = Adjust valve lash. Incorrect valve clearancewill result in increased engine noise and reducedengine output.

(19) = With the engine off and below normaloperating temperature, check to see thatthe thermostatically controlled engine coolingfan can be rotated by hand on viscous-operateddrives. Replace as needed.

(20) = Check shields and underhood insulationfor damage or looseness. Adjust or replaceas needed.

(21) = Inspect parking brake drum and linings forwear or cracks and check linkage and adjustment.

387

(22) = Wheel bearing service:

• Grease type — Clean, inspect, and lubricatewith the proper wheel bearing grease atdesignated intervals or when hubs areremoved. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 397.

• Oil-filled type — Some wheel bearings arelubricated by axle lubricant. When youhave oil-filled hubs, use lubricant identicalto that used in the axle. Lubricant changeintervals are the same for front and rear axles.However, you must maintain the properoil level between change intervals. SeeFront Wheel Bearings with Oil-Filled Hubson page 319 and Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 397.

(23) = Check the air intake system installationto see that gaskets are seated properly andall hose connections, fasteners, and othercomponents are tight. Tighten connectionsand fasteners or replace parts as required.

(24) = Evaporative Control System Service,if equipped: Check all fuel and vapor lines andhoses for proper connections and correct routing(or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).Replace parts as needed.

(25) = Replace spark plugs. Inspect wires fordamage. Check the wire boot and boot heatshield fit at spark plugs and coil. Replace partsas needed.

(26) = Check the fuel tank, fuel cap and fuel linesfor damage which could cause leakage. Inspectfuel cap for correct sealing ability and anyindications of damage. Check fuel cap gasketfor even filler neck imprint. Replace parts asneeded.

(27) = Check Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)system as described in the service manual.See Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 415.

388

(28) = Inspect Electronic Vacuum RegulatorValve (EVRV) filter for excessive contaminationor plugging. If needed, clean filter with solutionof soap and water, let dry and install.

(29) = Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you shouldhave your dealer perform this service. SeePart C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 397 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.For Caterpillar® diesel engines, always referto the Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation &Maintenance Manual for coolant recommendationsand change intervals.

(30) = Change the lubricant. SeePart C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 397.

(31) = Front axle service: Re-pack upper kingpinroller bearing.

(32) = Air brake service:

• Inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect drum brake linings for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts at eachwheel, including drums and wheel speedsensor wiring. Check brake pedal forexcessive free play or travel (or every6 months, whichever occurs first) and haveserviced if needed. Check brakes more oftenif driving habits and conditions result infrequent braking. Replace air dryer cartridgeonly if excessive oil or moisture is present.A small amount of oil in the system is normaland should not be considered as a reasonto replace the cartridge.

• Test air lines for leaks; tighten as needed.Replace compressor filter.

• Inspect air parking brake chamber for leaksand damage. Inspect lines and hoses forleaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Also checkall attachments for tightness, wear, or damage.Note: The spring brake section of the rearbrake diaphragms are non-serviceable.

389

• Replace the air compressor filter element,mounted on the air compressor. For remoteair compressor intake service, refer to engineair cleaner filter replacement.

• Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspectthe safety valve, service brake chambers,quick release valves, quick release/doublecheck valve combinations, parking brakecontrol valve, double check valves, pressureprotection valves, and ether injector(if equipped).

• Remove, disassemble, and clean theapplication valve; replace parts showing wear.

• Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspectthe spring brake control valve; replacerubber parts.

(33) = Clean and lubricate air brake automaticslack adjuster. Check pushrod travel andauto adjustment operation. Have servicedif needed.

(34) = Air brake chamber service: Check operation,mounting clamps, and air lines and check for leaks.

(35) = Trailer brake hand control valve service:Check operation; lubricate cam and follower.

(36) = Tighten the wheel stud nuts to the specifiedtorque values at 100 miles (160 km). Thereafter,tighten them 1,000 miles (1 600 km) after eachtime the wheel is removed. See Tighteningthe Wheel Nuts on page 324.

(37) = Inspect and clean any accumulated dirt,gravel, or other foreign objects from the valves andvalve boots as needed. Using light oil, lubricatebrake pedal to brake application valve linkagecomponents. Check any rubber boots for cracks,holes, or deterioration and replace if necessary.

390

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of yourvehicle.

For your safety and that of others, any of thesafety-related components that may have beendamaged in an accident should be checkedand any needed repairs made before operatingthe vehicle.

At the minimum, these routine checks should bemade every 6 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km),whichever occurs first. Whenever repairs areneeded, have them completed before operatingthe vehicle.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil (Caterpillar® DieselEngine) on page 264 or Engine Oil (GasolineEngine) on page 265 or Engine Oil(DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 268.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant (Gas and DURAMAX®/IsuzuEngines) on page 282 or Engine Coolant(Caterpillar® Diesel Engines) on page 285.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 293.

Tire Inflation CheckCheck tire inflation cold. Make sure the tires areinflated to the correct pressures. See Loading YourVehicle on page 233 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 321.

391

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light(if equipped) and all your belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts. If you see anything thatmight keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayedsafety belts replaced.

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 337.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. Part C tells you what to use.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all exposed surfaces such as doorchecks, door lock bolts, lock strike plates, doorhinge bushings, latches, and dovetail bumperwedges. Where oil holes are provided, a driplessoil can be used. The seat adjusters, seat track,door weatherstrips, and rubber cap bumpersshould also be lubricated. Part C tells you what touse. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.

Parking Brake CheckPark on a fairly steep hill and hold the vehicle withthe parking brake only. This checks holding ability.

392

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brakes.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try tostart the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P), if equipped,or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works inany other position, your vehicle needs service.On manual transmission vehicles, the startershould work only when the clutch pedal isall the way down.

Automatic Transmission ShiftIndicator CheckCheck that the indicator points to the gear chosen.

Steering CheckBe alert for any changes in steering action,abnormal front tire wear or steering wheel position.An inspection or service is needed when thesteering wheel is harder to turn or has too muchfree play, or if there are strange sounds whenturning or parking.

Brake System CheckBe alert to illumination of the low air warning lampor for the tone alarm, or changes in brakingaction, such as repeated pulling to one side,unusual sounds when braking or increasedbrake pedal travel. Make sure air brake systemreservoirs are drained daily with full systemair pressure, and check system for leaks.Any of these conditions could indicate the needfor brake system inspection and/or service.

393

Engine Cooling System ServiceInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace asneeded. Clean the outside of the radiator andair conditioning condenser. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap is recommended atleast once a year.

Exhaust System CheckBe alert for any changes in the sound of theexhaust system or any smell of fumes. Theseare signs the system may be leaking. Haveit checked and/or repaired at once. Refer toEngine Exhaust on page 130 and Runningthe Engine While Parked on page 131.

Windshield Wipers and Washers CheckCheck operation and condition of the wiperblades. Check the flow of the washer spray.

Defroster CheckMove the control to the defrost symbol and the fanto HI or the high symbol. Then check the airflowfrom the ducts at the inside base of the windshield.

Mirrors and Sun Visors CheckCheck that friction joints hold mirrors and sunvisors in place.

Seat Adjuster CheckWhen adjusting a manual seat, be sure seatadjusters latch by attempting to move the seatafter latching.

394

Lamps CheckCheck panel lighting, warning lights, indicatorlights, and interior lamps. On the outside,check: license plate lamps, sidemarker lamps,reflectors or lights on outside mirrors, headlamps,parking lamps, identification and clearancelamps, taillamps, brake lamps, turn signals,backup lamps, and hazard warning flashers.Have headlamp aim checked at once if beamsseem improperly aimed.

Glass, Mirrors, Lamps and/orReflectors Condition CheckLook for broken, scratched, dirty, or damagedglass, mirrors, lamps, or reflectors that couldreduce the view or visibility or cause injury.Replace, clean or repair promptly.

Door Latches CheckCheck that doors close, latch, and lock tightly.Check for broken, damaged, or missing partsthat might prevent tight latching.

Hood Latches CheckCheck that the hood closes firmly. Check forbroken, damaged, loose, or missing partsthat might prevent tight latching. Make sure thesecondary latch (if equipped) keeps the hoodfrom opening all the way when the primarylatch is released.

Fluid Leaks CheckCheck for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaksby looking at the surface beneath the vehicleafter it has been parked for awhile.

395

Underbody InspectionCorrosive materials used for ice, snow removal,and dust control can collect on the underbody.If these materials are not removed, acceleratedcorrosion (rust) can occur on underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaustsystem. At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody with plain water.Take care to clean well any areas where mudand other debris can collect. Sediment packedin closed areas of the frame should be loosenedbefore being flushed.

Engine Cover CheckCheck that the cab’s engine cover and seal(if equipped) are not torn or damaged.Be sure that the cover is clamped down firmlyto the floor.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part C.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

Tractor Protection (Breakaway)Valve CheckOn air brake models, remove, disassemble,clean, and inspect the tractor protection(breakaway) valve.

396

Part C: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(GasolineEngine)

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see “Engine Oil” in theIndex.


Engine Oil(DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel

Engines)

Engine oil with the letters CJ-4 orCI-4 is best for your vehicle. TheCJ-4 or CI-4 designation mayappear either alone or incombination with other APIdesignations, such as API CJ-4/SM.These letters show AmericanPetroleum Institute levels of quality.To determine the preferred viscosityfor your vehicle’s diesel engine,see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Oil(Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine)

See the Caterpillar® Operation &Maintenance Manual for engine oilrecommendations.

Engine Coolant(Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine)

See the Caterpillar® Operation &Maintenance Manual for enginecoolant recommendations.

397


Engine Coolant(GasolineEngine &

DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel)

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant (Gasand DURAMAX®/Isuzu Engines)on page 282 or Engine Coolant(Caterpillar® Diesel Engines)on page 285.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Clutch BearingLubricant

Clutch Bearing Lubricant(GM Part No. 12378484 orequivalent NLGI #3 consistency).

Exhaust BrakeBall Joint Cap

Lubricant

High-Temperature Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 903037) orNLGI #3 consistency.


Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransmission

Synthetic Manual TransmissionFluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345724,in Canada 10953510).

AutomaticTransmission

See the Allison Transmission®

Operator’s Manual for correcttransmission fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

398


Front WheelBearings

(Except OilFilled Hubs)

Wheel bearing lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category GC or GC-LB(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 993037).

Front WheelBearings withOil Filled Hubs

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant for Medium Duty Trucks(GM Part No. U.S. 89021675,in Canada 10953512).

Transfer Case(Four-Wheel

Drive)

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

Front Axle(Four-Wheel

Drive)


Rear Axle andRear Hubs



Rear Axle ShiftMotor Lubricant

Refrigerant Oil(GM Part No. U.S. 5416939,in Canada 10953496).

Propshafts andSplines

Wheel bearing lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category GC or GC-LB(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 993037).

Cab — DoorHinges and

Latches

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

399

Part D: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed theservice, and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” on the following record pages.Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Date Miles/km OrHours Serviced By Maintenance Record

400


401


402

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 404Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 404Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 406Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 406GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 407Roadside Assistance Program ................... 408Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 409Collision Damage Repair ........................... 410

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 414Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 414Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 414Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 414Service Publications Ordering Information .... 415

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

403

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to GMC. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, contact the GM Medium Duty TruckCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-862-4389.In Canada, contact GM of Canada CustomerCommunication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting GMC please rememberthat your concern will likely be resolved at adealer’s facility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have a concern.

404

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights you mayhave. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty andOwner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

405

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who usethe Text Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTYequipment available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can communicate withGMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesGMC encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail, refer to the addressesbelow.

United States – Customer AssistanceGM Medium Duty Truck Customer AssistanceCenterCustomer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 44947Detroit, MI 48244

www.GMC.com

1-800-862-43891-800-462-8583 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs)Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

406

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

407

Roadside Assistance ProgramGM Medium Duty Truck’s Roadside Assistanceprovides stranded owners with towing servicefor disabled vehicles.

This service combines the efforts of trainedtelephone representatives with a network ofGM Medium Duty Truck’s dealer services.

Just dial GM Medium Duty Truck RoadsideAssistance at 1-800-862-4389 to reach a qualifiedrepresentative who can assist you in a repair orarrange a tow. Other recommended servicescan also be arranged for situations such asretrieving locked in keys, changing a tire, ordelivering gasoline, at a charge to the customer.We also provide dealer information at nocharge, such as location of the nearest authorizedmedium duty GM Truck dealer and their hoursof operation.

Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,7 days a week, 365 days a year. Should youhave any questions about Roadside Assistance,call the GM Medium Duty Truck RoadsideAssistance Center or contact your dealer.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceIn Canada, Medium Duty trucks are not eligible forRoadside Assistance services. However, owners/operators who contact Roadside Assistance bycalling 1-800-268-6800 may have a tow arrangedfor them at the owner/operator expense.

If a Medium Duty truck is towed to the nearestGeneral Motors dealership and the towingwas necessary due to failure of a warranted part,the dealer will accept the towing charges andsubmit them as part of the warranty claim.

408

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledevent data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,

and the severity of a collision. This informationhas been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

409

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

410

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

411

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accidentuntil all matters have been taken care of.Move your vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 408 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walkyou through the information they will need.If they ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee.

412

In some states/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may not benecessary. This is especially true if there areno injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipment

parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased youmay be obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

413

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-862-4389,or write:

GM Medium Duty TruckCustomer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 44947Detroit, MI 48244

414

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).

415

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner’smanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

416

AAccessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 154Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ..... 236Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 80Additives, Fuel ............................................ 247Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 341Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 277Air Conditioning ........................................... 155Air Conditioning System .............................. 319Air Pressure Gage ...................................... 181Air Shift Control ........................................... 112Air Suspension ............................................ 128Air Suspension Seats .................................... 13Airbag

Off Light .................................................. 164Readiness Light ....................................... 163

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module(SDM) ...................................................... 409

Airbag System ............................................... 68Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 80Airbag Off Switch ....................................... 76How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 74

Airbag System (cont.)Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 79What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 74What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 73Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

AM-FM Radio .............................................. 184Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 200Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 208Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 170Anti-Lock Brakes, Trailer System Warning

Light ........................................................ 170Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 337Care of Safety Belts ................................ 334Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 339Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 335Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 331Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 333Finish Care .............................................. 336Finish Damage ......................................... 338Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 334

417

Appearance Care (cont.)Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 338Tires ........................................................ 338Underbody Maintenance ........................... 338Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 339Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 335Weatherstrips ........................................... 334Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 337

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 155Audio System(s) .......................................... 182

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 184Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .......... 198Care of Your CD Player ........................... 200Care of Your CDs .................................... 200Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 200Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 200Radio with Cassette ................................. 186Radio with CD ......................................... 192Setting the Time ...................................... 183Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 198Understanding Radio Reception ............... 198

Automatic Ether Injection System ................ 318

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 280Operation ................................................. 113

Axle, Two-Speed Rear Axle Electric ShiftControl ..................................................... 111

BBattery ........................................................ 303Bench Seat, Split .......................................... 13Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 208Diesel Engine Exhaust ............................. 109Emergencies ............................................ 209Exhaust Indicator Light ............................. 176Hydraulic Systems ................................... 207Parking ........................................... 124, 125System Warning Light .............................. 168Trailer Hand Control Valve ....................... 210

Brakes ........................................................ 294Parking Brake Burnish Procedure ............. 127

Braking ....................................................... 206

418

Braking in Emergencies ............................... 209Break-In, New Vehicle ................................... 93Bucket Seats .................................................. 9Bulb Replacement ....................................... 314

CCalifornia Proposition 65 Warning ................ 244Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 348Carbon Monoxide ............................... 130, 227Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 334Your Cassette Tape Player ....................... 198Your CD Player ........................................ 200Your CDs ................................................. 200

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 134Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ........ 37Charging System Light ................................ 165Check

Engine Light ............................................ 172Gages Warning Light ............................... 179

Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 263Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 339

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 45Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 57Older Children ........................................... 42Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position ............................. 58Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Rear Seat Position (Crew Cab) orCenter Front Position .............................. 60

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position ................................. 63

Where to Put the Restraint ................. 54, 55Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 200Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 155Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 337Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 335Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 333Finish Care .............................................. 336Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 331Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 334Tires ........................................................ 338

419

Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 338Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 335Weatherstrips ........................................... 334Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 337

Climate Control System ............................... 155Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 158Rear Heating System ............................... 159

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 410Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 206Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 171Heater, Engine ......................................... 108Low Warning Light ................................... 171Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 285

Cooling System ........................................... 288Cruise Control ............................................. 144Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 406

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 406Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 404GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 407Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 414Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 414

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ............................... 414Roadside Assistance Program .................. 408Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 415

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 149Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 178Defensive Driving ........................................ 202Diesel Engine

Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown .... 102Exhaust Brake ......................................... 109Exhaust Restrictor .................................... 105Fuel ......................................................... 248High Idle System ..................................... 104Starting ...................................................... 98

Differential Lock Control, Rear Axle ............. 211Differential Lock Indicator Light .................... 177Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 245Dome Lamps ............................................... 151Door

Locks ......................................................... 89Power Door Locks ..................................... 90

420

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 219City .......................................................... 223Defensive ................................................. 202Drunken ................................................... 203Freeway ................................................... 224Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 226In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 220Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 232Tow Hooks ............................................... 233Winter ...................................................... 227

Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 322

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 341Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 342Fusible Links ............................................ 342Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 341Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 342Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 342

Electrical System (cont.)Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 345Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 342

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 277Alarm and Automatic Shutdown ................ 102Battery ..................................................... 303Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 174Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 172Checks Before Operating ......................... 107Coolant ........................................... 282, 285Coolant Heater ......................................... 108Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 171Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake ................... 109Drive Belt Routing .................................... 356Exhaust ................................................... 130Exhaust Restrictor .................................... 105Fan Breakage .......................................... 246Fan Noise ................................................ 292High Idle System ..................................... 104Oil .......................................... 264, 265, 268Oil Life System ....................... 272, 274, 276Overheating ............................................. 286Overspeed Warning Light ......................... 175Reduced Power Light ............................... 177

421

Engine (cont.)Shutdown Warning Light .......................... 175Speed Limiter .......................................... 161Starter Over-Crank Protection .................... 95Starting Your Diesel ................................... 98Starting Your Gasoline ............................... 95

Entry Lighting .............................................. 152Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 409Exhaust Brake Indicator Light ...................... 176Exhaust Restrictor ....................................... 105Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41Exterior Lamps ............................................ 148

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 277Filter Minder Gage ...................................... 181Finish Damage ............................................ 338Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 200Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 140Flat Tire ...................................................... 330Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 280Manual Transmission ................................ 280Power Steering ........................................ 293Windshield Washer .................................. 293

Fluid (cont.)Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 117, 311Front Axle ................................................... 312Front Wheel Bearings with Oil-Filled Hubs ... 319Fuel ............................................................ 247

Additives .................................................. 247Diesel Engine Fuel ................................... 248Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 262Filling Your Tank ...................................... 260Filter ........................................................ 316Filter Replacement ................................... 259Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 260Gage ....................................................... 179Gasoline Octane ...................................... 247Gasoline Specifications ............................ 247Primary Filter and Water Separator .......... 316Running Out of Fuel ................................ 258Secondary Filter and Water Separator/

Heater .................................................. 317Very Cold Weather Operation ................... 251Water in Fuel ........................................... 252Water in Warning Light ............................ 180What Fuel to Use .................................... 249

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 342Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 342

422

Fuses (cont.)Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 345Windshield Wiper ..................................... 342

GGage

Air Pressure ............................................. 181Check Gages Warning Light ..................... 179Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 171Filter Minder ............................................ 181Fuel ......................................................... 179Hourmeter ................................................ 182Oil Pressure ............................................. 173Speedometer ........................................... 161Tachometer .............................................. 161Transmission Temperature ........................ 176Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 166

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 247Specifications ........................................... 247

Gasoline Engine, Starting .............................. 95GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 407

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 140Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 341Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 314Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 149High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 142On Reminder ........................................... 149

Heater ......................................................... 155High Idle System ......................................... 104Highbeam On Light ..................................... 178Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 225Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 226Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 263Latches .................................................... 263

Horn ............................................................ 140Hourmeter Gage .......................................... 182How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26Hydraulic Brake Systems ............................. 207

423

IIgnition Positions ........................................... 94Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 321Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 138Switchbank .............................................. 152

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 151Cluster ..................................................... 160

JJump Starting .............................................. 304

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 85Keys ............................................................. 84

LLamps

Dome ....................................................... 151Exterior .................................................... 148

Lamps (cont.)Marker ..................................................... 150Reading ................................................... 152

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 57

LightAirbag Off ................................................ 164Airbag Readiness ..................................... 163Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 170Brake System Warning ............................. 168Change Engine Oil ................................... 174Charging System ..................................... 165Check Gages Warning ............................. 179Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 178Differential Lock Indicator ......................... 177Engine Overspeed Warning ...................... 175Engine Shutdown Warning ....................... 175Exhaust Brake Indicator ........................... 176Highbeam On .......................................... 178Low Coolant Warning ............................... 171Low Oil Level ........................................... 174Low Washer Fluid Warning ...................... 178Malfunction Indicator ................................ 172Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ................ 167Reduced Engine Power ............................ 177Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 162Safety Belt Reminder Tone ...................... 162

424

Light (cont.)Service Transmission Warning .................. 167Trailer Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ... 170Wait to Start Indicator .............................. 172Water in Fuel Warning ............................. 180

LightingEntry ........................................................ 152

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 234Locks

Door .......................................................... 89Power Door ............................................... 90

Loss of Control ........................................... 217Low Coolant Warning Light .......................... 171Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ................. 178

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .... 354Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 391At Least Once a Year .............................. 396At Least Twice a Year .............................. 392How This Section is Organized ................ 360Introduction .............................................. 360Maintenance Requirements ...................... 360Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 362

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Part B - Owner Checks and Services ....... 391Part C - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 397Part D - Maintenance Record ................... 400Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 363Scheduled Maintenance Supplements ...... 363Using ....................................................... 362Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 360

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 172Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 280Operation ................................................. 114

Manual Windows ........................................... 91Marker Lamps ............................................. 150Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 132Outside Convex Mirrors ............................ 133Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 133Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 132Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 132

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................... 93Noise Control System, Tampering ................ 313Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 354

425

OOdometer .................................................... 161Odometer, Trip ............................................ 161Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 215Oil

Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 174Engine ................................... 264, 265, 268Low Oil Level Light .................................. 174Pressure Gage ......................................... 173

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ........ 272, 274, 276Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42Other Service Items

Air Conditioning System ........................... 319Automatic Ether Injection System ............. 318Front Wheel Bearings with

Oil-Filled Hubs ...................................... 319Fuel Filter ................................................ 316Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ..... 316Secondary Fuel Filter and Water

Separator/Heater ................................... 317Other Warning Devices ................................ 140Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 158Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 154

OutsideConvex Mirrors ........................................ 133Heated Mirrors ......................................... 133Manual Mirrors ......................................... 132Power Mirrors .......................................... 132

Overspeed Warning Light ............................ 175Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 338Parking ....................................................... 123

Brake .............................................. 124, 125Brake Burnish Procedure ......................... 127Over Things That Burn ............................ 129

Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services .... 362Part B - Owner Checks and Services ........... 391Part C - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 397Part D - Maintenance Record ....................... 400Passing ....................................................... 216Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 154Door Locks ................................................ 90

426

Power (cont.)Electrical System ..................................... 342Reduced Engine Light .............................. 177Steering Fluid .......................................... 293Windows .................................................... 92

Power Take-Off (PTO) ................................. 116

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 25

RRadios ........................................................ 182

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 184Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .......... 198Care of Your CD Player ........................... 200Care of Your CDs .................................... 200Radio with Cassette ................................. 186Radio with CD ......................................... 192Setting the Time ...................................... 183Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 198Understanding Reception ......................... 198

Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ................... 167Reading Lamps ........................................... 152

Rear Axle .................................................... 309Differential Lock Control ........................... 211Shift Motor ............................................... 310Two-Speed Electric Shift Control .............. 111

Rear Heating System .................................. 159Rear Outside Passenger Positions, Safety

Belts .......................................................... 38Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 20Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 132Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 177Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 85Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 86Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 414General Motors ........................................ 414United States Government ....................... 414

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 81Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 82Right Front Passenger Position, Safety

Belts .......................................................... 36Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 408

427

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 232Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 356Running Out of Fuel .................................... 258Running the Engine While Parked ............... 131

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ........................................ 162Reminder Tone ........................................ 162

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 334Center Passenger Position ......................... 37Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ....................................................... 25Rear Outside Passenger Positions ............. 38Right Front Passenger Position .................. 36Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 36Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 21Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 35

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 363Scheduled Maintenance Supplements .......... 363

SeatsAir Suspension Seats ................................. 13Bucket Seats ............................................... 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 20Split Bench Seat ........................................ 13

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Rear Seat Position (Crew Cab)

or Center Front Position ......................... 60Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 58Right Front Seat Position ........................... 63

Service ........................................................ 244California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 244Doing Your Own Work ............................. 245Engine Fan Breakage .............................. 246Engine Soon Light ................................... 172Publications Ordering Information ............. 415Transmission Warning Light ..................... 167

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 79Setting the Time .......................................... 183Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 338Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 35Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 142Sliding Rear Windows ................................... 92Snow Plow .................................................. 236Specifications, Capacities ............................ 348Speedometer ............................................... 161Split Bench Seat ........................................... 13

428

Starting Your Diesel Engine ........................... 98Starting Your Gasoline Engine ....................... 95Steering ...................................................... 213Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 140Storage Areas ............................................. 134

Center Console Storage Area ................... 134Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 232Sun Visors .................................................... 93Suspension, Air ........................................... 128Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .................... 152

TTachometer ................................................. 161Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 198Tilt Wheel .................................................... 140Tires ........................................................... 320

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 337

Cleaning .................................................. 338Dual Tire Operation .................................. 322If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 330Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 321Tightening the Wheel Nuts ....................... 324Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 323Wheel Loading ......................................... 321

Tires (cont.)Wheel Replacement ................................. 328When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 322

Tow Hooks .................................................. 233Towing

Your Vehicle ............................................. 237Traction

Control System (TCS) .............................. 212Trailer

Connections ............................................. 239Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve ................ 210Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 280Fluid, Manual ........................................... 280Service Warning Light .............................. 167Temperature Gage ................................... 176

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 113Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 114Trip Odometer ............................................. 161Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 142Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 141Two-Speed Rear Axle Electric Shift Control .... 111

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 198

429

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 206Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 234Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 409

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 340Service Parts Identification Label .............. 341

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 158Visors ........................................................... 93Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 166

WWait to Start Indicator ................................. 172Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 159Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 140Other Warning Devices ............................ 140Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ................ 178

WaterFuel ......................................................... 252

Water in Fuel Warning Light ........................ 180What Fuel to Use ........................................ 249Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 323Front Bearings with Oil-Filled Hubs .......... 319Loading .................................................... 321Replacement ............................................ 328Tightening the Wheel Nuts ....................... 324

Where to Put the Restraint ..................... 54, 55Windows ....................................................... 91

Manual ...................................................... 91Power ........................................................ 92Sliding Rear ............................................... 92

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 144Washer Fluid ........................................... 293Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 314Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 337Wiper Fuses ............................................ 342Wipers ..................................................... 143

Winter Driving ............................................. 227

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 360

430

2007 gmc topkick owner manual m - general motors · pdf file2007 gmc topkick owner manual m 1....

Documents